JP2018134136A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent gambling properties from becoming excessively high.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a normal variation winning device; a special variation winning device including thereinside a specific area (probability variation operating area 38h) where game balls can enter; probability control means for setting an occurrence probability state of a special result either in a normal probability state or in a high probability state higher than the normal probability state; and count means for counting the number of continuations (number of probability variation continuations) of the high probability state. The probability control means sets the probability state in the normal probability state if a game ball is not determined to have entered the specific area, sets the probability state in the high probability state if a game ball is determined to have entered the specific area and if the number of continuations does not reach a prescribed upper limit number (limit number), and sets the probability state in the normal probability state if a game ball is determined to have entered the specific area and if the number of continuations reaches the prescribed upper limit number. The count means resets the number of continuations on the basis of an ending of an electric support state (time shortening state).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 157

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that generates a special game state that gives a player a game value when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner is a special result.

  Conventionally, a winning entrance called a start winning opening has been provided in the game area on the game board, and a random number is obtained based on the winning of the hit ball to the starting winning opening, and the winning determination is made. A gaming machine that provides a player with a predetermined benefit (for example, a special gaming state) is widely used (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-89978 A

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a case where gambling is too high.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a result of a variation display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information results in a special result,
A normally variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win and an open state in which a game ball can win,
A special variable winning device having a specific area into which a game ball can flow, and which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win.
Probability control means for setting the probability state in which the special result occurs to either a normal probability state or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state;
Determining means for determining whether or not a game ball won in the special variation winning device flows into the specific area;
An electric support control means capable of generating an electric support state in which a game ball is more likely to win the normal variation winning device than the normal state until the predetermined number of times of the variable display game is executed after the special game state ends;
Counting means for counting the number of continuations of the high probability state,
The probability control means includes
If it is not determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the normal probability state,
When it is determined that a game ball has flowed into the specific area, and the number of continuations has not reached a predetermined upper limit number, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set as the high probability state. Set to
When it is determined that a game ball has flowed into the specific area and the number of continuations has reached the predetermined upper limit number, the probability state after the end of the special game state is determined as the normal probability. Set to the state,
The counting means resets the number of continuations based on the end of the power support state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the 1st special variation winning device. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect in a special game state. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a figure explaining a model specification command. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining sphere monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a discharge ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch big hit judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining an upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a lower great prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a probability change operation area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining sphere process timer update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure game information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a lever solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of a normal fluctuation winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric power remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining abnormal discharge | emission monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a figure which shows an example of Renso notification effect. It is a figure which shows an example of Renso notification effect. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a consecutive resort notification effect setting process and a consecutive resort notification effect cancellation process. It is a figure which shows an example of a suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining the modification of V prize notification effect. It is a figure explaining a high probability state. It is a figure explaining the modifications 1-3. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in the modification 1-1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 1-1. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation group table when it can select in a high probability state among the fluctuation | variation group tables in the modification 1-1, and a result is jackpot. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in the modification 1-2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 1-2. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation group table when it can select in a high probability state among the fluctuation | variation group tables in modification 1-2, and a result is jackpot. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 2-1. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation group table when it can select in a high probability state among the fluctuation | variation group tables in the modification 2-1, and a result is a loss. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 2-2. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation group table in case the selection is possible in a high probability state among the fluctuation | variation group tables in modification 2-2, and a result is a loss. It is a figure explaining the modification 4. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process in the modification 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process in the modified example 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening remaining ball processing in Modification 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display middle process in the modification 4-2. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process in the modification 4-2. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening remaining ball processing in modification 4-2. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in the modification 5. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 5-1. It is a figure explaining an example of the ending effect in the modification 5-1. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in the production | presentation control apparatus in the modification 5-1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit system command processing in the modification 5-1. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process and the ending effect switching process in the modified example 5-1. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 5-2. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 5-3. It is a flowchart explaining the ending effect setting process and the ending effect switch process in the modification 5-3. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 5-4. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 5-5. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 6-1. It is a flowchart explaining the lower big prize opening switch monitoring process in the modified example 6-1. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control process in the modified example 6-1. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 6-2. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval process in the modification 6-2. It is a flowchart explaining the lower big prize opening switch monitoring process in modification 6-2. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode in the special game state in modification 6-3. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining a ball storage production device. It is a figure explaining the ball storage production device in modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification 2 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification 3 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification 4 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification 4 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the principal part of the center case in the modification 4 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification 4 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the specification of the game machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the big hit end process in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction variation frequency update process in the case of performing the modification of the jackpot end process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the big hit end process in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of the big hit end process in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction variation frequency update process in the case of performing the modification of the jackpot end process in the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 3 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 4 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the limit function in the modification 2 of 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  The frame decoration device 18 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is one of auxiliary effect devices capable of executing an assist effect that is an effect performed in response to a game effect that is an effect corresponding to the progress of the game. The protrusion part 80 which comprises is provided. The protruding portion 80 is provided so as to protrude from the right side surface of the front frame 12 so that a player playing a game on the gaming machine can visually recognize the game and a game playing on the gaming machine. Visible from other persons. The protrusion 80 includes a plurality of light emitting regions 81 arranged along the vertical direction. Each light emitting area 81 can control the light emitting mode (turning on, turning off, blinking, light emitting color, etc.) independently, and the auxiliary effect is executed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81.

  The game effect that is an effect in accordance with the progress of the game includes, for example, an error notification for notifying that an error has occurred in the gaming machine, a game effect related to the currently running special-figure display game, and a pre-determination for the start-up memory There are a pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the result, an effect button operation effect that instructs the operation of the operation means, and a firing direction instruction notification that instructs the firing direction of the game ball in the game area. In the projecting portion 80, an auxiliary effect is executed by changing the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81 in accordance with the game effect selected according to the current game state from among these game effects.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like.
Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. In addition, the effect button 25 has a built-in LED so that the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.) on the upper surface can be changed. Auxiliary effects can be executed. That is, the effect button 25 also constitutes one of the auxiliary effect devices that can execute the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

Furthermore, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge that is operated to discharge a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display regions) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure 8 are arranged. Each illuminant can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.), and identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display by controlling the light emission mode. is there. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. The display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) in a variable manner corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game and then stops the display. Further, an effect related to the special figure variation display game can be executed by changing the light emission mode.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 is provided above the display device 41 in the center case 40 to perform a game effect by operating. The board effect device 44 is a drum-type device that can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is configured such that only a part of the circumferential surface facing the front is visible to the player. . Information is displayed for each area that can be visually recognized when facing the front, and multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction. Information displayed on the front facing the front Thus, the special figure variation display game is produced. In addition, a decorative special figure start memory display unit 42 for performing a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided below the display device 41 in the center case 40.

In addition, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the first special figure variation display game is provided below the center case 40 in the game area 32. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).
Further, below the start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like is provided.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (common symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. A game ball that has passed through the normal start gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

Further, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the normal start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening, A start winning area) is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (disadvantageous for the player) that is vertically closed so that game balls cannot flow in is maintained. When the result of the universal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal variation solenoid winning is operated by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as the driving device so that the upper end side is tilted forward. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows. A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and it may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  In the game area 32, three general winning holes 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning hole 35 is positioned on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal variable winning device 37. Is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

  Furthermore, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variable prize winning device (lower big prize opening) which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game 38 and a second special variable prize-winning device (upper university prize-winning opening) 39 are provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a lower large prize opening opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a lower large prize opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. Makes it easier for the game ball to flow into the lower game winning opening by converting the lower game winning opening from the closed state to the opened state, and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. A lower major prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) is provided inside the lower major prize opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower major prize opening. Yes.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side. Depending on how, the state is converted from the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. Makes it easier for the game ball to flow into the upper game winning opening by converting the upper game winning opening from a closed state to an open state, and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. An upper prize port switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). Yes.

  FIG. 3 shows a flow path of game balls in the first special variation winning device 38. Inside the first special variable winning device 38 (winning area), a lower big prize opening switch (count switch) 38a as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning device 38 is disposed. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the lower large winning port switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

  The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probability change operation region 38h into which a game ball can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the probability change operation region 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member 38i is a plate-like member that is slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 3, the lever member 38i protrudes forward to cover the probability changing operation region 38h, and the closed state in which the game ball cannot flow into the probability changing operation region 38h; And can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can flow into the probability changing operation region 38h.

  The probability variation operation region 38h is provided with a probability variation operation region switch 38d that can detect the inflow of game balls. The game ball that has flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 38d, and then the lower flow path 38k. Flow into. Based on the detection of the game ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to a high probability state after the special game state is ended.

  Further, a passage port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided on the left downstream side of the probability change operation region 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation region 38h After being detected by the passage port switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is configured such that a flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the probability variation operating region 38h flows down and a flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the passage port switch 38g flow downstream. A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, and all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. After that, it flows into the discharge channel for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In the first special variation winning device 38 configured as described above, the number of game balls detected by the lower large winning port switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the probability changing operation region switch 38d and the passing port switch 38g match. By doing this, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Further, since the number of game balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are all. It can be confirmed that it was discharged. Further, the number of game balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, so that the game balls flowing into the first special variable prize winning device 38 can be obtained. It can be confirmed that everything was discharged.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 36 or the left general winning opening 35 by adjusting the firing force and firing a game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed), and the right game area The game ball is fired (so-called right-handed) to win the ordinary start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the right general winning opening 35. Can be aimed at.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display section) for a first special figure fluctuation display game constituted by a seven-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. ) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) for the second special figure fluctuation display game and the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game constituted by the LED lamp A special figure 1 hold indicator 54 (D11, D12) for notifying the memory number and a special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (D13, D14) for notifying the start memory number of the second special figure variable display game are provided.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed), a short time state (during normal power support, specific game state) The first gaming state display unit 76 (D9) for informing whether the player is in the middle), and the first gaming state display unit 76 (D9) for informing the player of the left strike (normal strike) and the right strike, which is advantageous to the player (the strike method corresponding to the game state). A two-game state display unit 77 (D8) is provided. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state display unit, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It has been.
Further, the collective display device 50 includes a general map display 74 (D10, D18) for a general map display game, and a general map hold display 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the start memory number of the general map display game. ) And are provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the first special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, in addition to the central segment, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments. The displayed eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. Moreover, you may display that it is changing by displaying sequentially the some identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

The special figure 1 hold display 54 shows the number of undigested balls (first start memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. As shown in FIG. 4 (c), display is performed by turning off and lighting (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.
The special figure 2 hold display 55 displays the number of undigested balls (second start memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37 which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, As shown in FIG. 4C, display is performed by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.
The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off and selected according to the result in the special game state as shown in FIG. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the first game state display unit 76 turns on the LED when in the time-short state, and turns off the LED when not in the time-short state.
As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the second gaming state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the gaming state is more advantageous for the player to the left than the right strike (normal strike). In a gaming state where it is more advantageous for the player to make a right strike than to make a left strike, the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4E, the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the high probability state is present when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when the state is not the high probability state.

In the general map change display game in the general map display 74, the change symbol number shown in FIG. 4 (g) is alternately changed and the two LEDs are alternately lit during the variable display of the general map display game. Display that it is changing. If the result is a win, it is turned on in a lighting manner according to the hit type and indicates that it is a hit, and if the result is out of order, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that they are out of place. .
The general map hold indicator 75 indicates the number of undigested balls (the number of normal map start memory = the number of reserves) out of the number of passing balls of the general map start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), display is performed by turning off and turning on (flashing) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. In other words, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) serves as a backup storage means capable of holding stored data even when the power is cut off (a state where power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). And, when the power is restored, the control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.
Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated to cancel the error even when the power is not turned on, but in this case, only the error is canceled and processing such as initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed. .

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included. In addition, a variation pattern table for determining the variation time of the normal variation display game is also stored.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b include a gate switch 34a in the normal start gate 34, a winning port switch 35a in the general winning port 35, a lower large winning port switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, and a second special button. Upper prize winning port switch 39a in the variable winning device 39, a probability changing operation region switch 38d provided in a probability changing operation region 38h in the first special variable winning device 38, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a normal variable winning a prize A start port 2 switch 37a in the device 37, a passage port switch 38g for detecting a game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, and a game discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a sphere and a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine are connected.

  Outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, the upper large winning port switch 39a, the probability changing operation region switch 38d, the starting port 1 switch 36a, and the starting port The detection signal of the two switch 37 a is input to the second input port 123.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124.
In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from a fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (provided on the front frame 12). And a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) is also input. . Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

  Among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage port switch 38g among the outputs to the third input port 124 are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. Is also supplied to a test firing test apparatus (not shown). Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality) from the payout control device 200, a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (lower A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the tray 23 (full), a touch switch signal (a signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) ) And supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 is provided. The first input port 122 has a detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and a main body frame open detection provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Also, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140. The lower special prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38, the upper special prize opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39, A second output port 134 is provided for outputting operation data of a normal solenoid 37c for opening the variable winning device 37 and a lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the lower large prize opening solenoid 38b, the upper large prize opening solenoid 39b, the universal solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134, and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output A third driver 138c for outputting an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the port 136, and an external information signal supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the ordinary variable winning device 37, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, the upper large The winning opening switch 39a, the probability changing operation area switch 38d, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage opening switch 38g in the first special variable winning device 38 are provided with a magnetic detection coil, and a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A device control circuit 312 and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the display device control circuit 312 to display the contents, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, and turns on the decoration lamp. Then, processing such as motor / solenoid drive control and production time management is executed. The display device control circuit 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the front frame 12 and the like. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect moving body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15. You may have.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the effect button 25, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, DC12V for driving the display device 41, the motor and the LED, and DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving the motor, the LED and the speaker is generated. Has been. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, the display device control circuit 312, the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc.) Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37, the first special variable prize winning device 38, or the second special variable prize winning device 39 is won or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32. 32 is discharged. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning winning port. The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A gate switch 34 a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball thrown in passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure start memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four pieces). If it is less than (), the usual figure start memory number is added (+1), and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 75 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the normal figure start memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It has come to be.

  Then, when there is a general map start memory and the normal map variable display game can be started, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed, the normal map variable display game is hit and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the winning state is not the winning state, the winning judgment random number value stored in the first stored base map start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether or not the hitting of the base map variable display game is lost. Then, a process for starting the normal map change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  In addition, as a process for executing the normal variation display game, the game control device 100 determines in advance a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined variation time on the general diagram display 74 provided in the collective display device 50. After the usual map change display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order is performed, a process for displaying the usual figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed. The universal display 74 is configured by the display device 41. For example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as the normal identification information, and after this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed by stopping the display. It may be configured.

  When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a lighting pattern that is either the first per-stop symbol or the second per-stop symbol that makes a special result mode corresponding to the type of the hit is displayed on the general-purpose indicator 74. In addition to displaying a stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform control for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, the general display display 74 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is a result of the shift.

  Also, the winning ball to the start winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control apparatus 100, the first start memory that makes the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). The second start memory that stores the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winning at the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The stored number of start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display at a predetermined location of the center case 40. Is done.

  Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first special figure variation display game in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The jackpot determination random number value thus determined is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

  When the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 1 display 51 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 1 fluctuation display, the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed. When the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 2 display 52 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 2 fluctuation display, the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed.

  Further, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, etc.) corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (variable display device). A process for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game for variably displaying is performed. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. Further, in the display device 41, various presentation displays such as a change in display color and variation mode are performed to improve interest.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a lighting pattern as a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, A process for generating a gaming state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the lower big prize winning solenoid 38b, and the game ball flows into the lower big prize winning opening. And the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the upper prize winning solenoid 39b, and the control allowing the game ball to flow into the upper prize winning opening is performed. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved, A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends when a game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in a specific round. ing. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a special result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time. In the short time state, it is possible to control so that the normal stop time for displaying the result of the normal change display game becomes the second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Further, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the opening time (the general electric release time) is longer than the first opening time in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be two open times. Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of the general electric power) is larger than the number of times of opening the first time, with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. Can be set. In the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (the normal map probability) is higher than the low probability (for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state (for example, 250/251). Is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In the present embodiment, it is set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure variation display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are executed in the order of occurrence of the start memory. In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  7 and 8 show operations of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state. There are five types of special results: 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 5R normal, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal, which are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. Each jackpot type number indicates the number of rounds. Probability means that there is a high probability that a game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h, and that it is likely to become a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. Indicates that the probability that a game ball will flow into the probability change operation region 38h is low, and it is difficult for a high probability state (probability change state) to occur after the special game state ends. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is determined is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h. Therefore, even if the jackpot type is probability variation, the probability variation operation region 38h. If a game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and even if the big hit type is normal, the game state enters a high probability state if the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h.

  In FIG. 7, the opening aspect in each round with each jackpot type was shown. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 12R probability variation, the lower V opening that opens the first special variation winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower V opening is an opening mode in which a game ball is likely to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. In the second and subsequent rounds, upper long opening for opening the second special variable winning device 39 and lower long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 are alternately performed. Similarly, in the 5R probability variation and 4R probability variation in which the jackpot type is a certain variation, the lower V is opened to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. Also, in the case of 5R normal and 4R normal where the big hit type is normal, the lower short is opened to open the first special variable winning device 38 in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that a game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h is lower than the lower V opening.

  In any type of jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are configured to be alternately opened, so that a predetermined number of game balls have been won or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. When the predetermined interval time has passed after the round has ended, the other special variable winning device is released. It should be noted that the game ball can be allowed to flow into the probability changing operation region 38h only in the lower V opening and the lower short opening performed in the first round. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variable winning device 39, there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h. Further, since the lever member 38i is not operated in the lower long opening or the lower short opening that is not the first round, there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h. In other words, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round that is a round in which the game ball may flow into the probability changing operation area 38h forming the specific area is the first round. Of course, this specific round may be a round other than the first round.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), in the upper long opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 ms has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9) When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is established, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the interval time and the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the special gaming state, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are configured to be opened alternately. Although the device 38 is opened, the second special variable winning device 39 continues the upper ball winning opening remaining ball processing time. The lower short opening shown in FIG. 8B is the same as the upper long opening except that the openable time and the interval time are different.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, when the lower V is opened, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probability change operation region 38h and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability change operation region 38h. The game ball is ready to flow. The state in which the probability variation operation region switch 38d is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operation region switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the probability change operation region switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the game ball is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened will flow into the probability changing operation area 38h.

  When 200 ms elapses from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and the condition of either whether the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins is satisfied. Then, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower sphere winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

  In addition, after the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability changing operation region switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the lever solenoid 38f is kept on for a long time, so that the game ball flows almost certainly into the probability changing operation region 38h. It will be. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. The game balls that have been played can also flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is processed in the lower large winning port remaining ball processing. When all the balls are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42) to end the operation, and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled.

  In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls won in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF when the discharge is completed and the operation is finished. The probability changing operation region switch 38d becomes invalid.

  In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is the lower large winning port remaining ball processing time. In the case where all the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged before the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43). The lever solenoid 38f is turned off to complete the operation. In this case, after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43), the probability variation operation region switch 38d becomes invalid after 100 ms (t44).

  As shown in FIG. 8D, in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening ends. The round ends (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also ON for a short time, the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal.

  Note that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid / invalid switching of the probability variation operation region switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case where the lower V is released as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 ( t56-t63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the lower ball winning port remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. As a result, the operation ends and the probability change operation region switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62). When the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62) and 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  However, when the lower short circuit is opened, the lever solenoid 38f and the probability variation operating region switch 38d are controlled as shown in FIG. 8D only when the lower short circuit is opened in the first round. When the lower short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated, and the probability change operation region switch 38d remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining sphere processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the lower long release, the first special variable prize-winning device 38 is released at the start of the round (t61), and the openable time of 25000 ms has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 9). When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t62). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower sphere winning ball remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In the lower long open state, the lever solenoid 38f remains in the OFF state, and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is also disabled.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 14 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, first, the process for prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed.
Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4.
Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  Further, the power-on delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8).
If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20).
If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 10, and processing is performed when normal recovery from the power failure is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy judging means for judging the legitimacy of predetermined data stored in the storage means (RAM 111C) when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (does not match) (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.
Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, The on (lighting) data of the third game state display section 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24).
And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). That is, when the validity is confirmed by the validity judgment means, the game is resumed based on the data stored in the storage means.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28).
Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The region to be initialized here is a region relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration region and the production mode.
And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time (for example, A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound for 30 seconds).

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) Save in the specified area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number to determine the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit design random number) From (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Yes. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same cycle as the processing. In addition, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number adopt a so-called “initial value change method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Yes. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37).
If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37).
Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization operation section is read before the start of the standby time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

  FIG. 11 shows the types of model designation commands that are one of the commands transmitted in step S25 and step S30. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, model type A as a plurality of model types having different control contents such as the probability of a big hit, the number of times of execution of a special-figure variable display game in a short-time state, the type of big hit, distribution, and distribution of effects. There are four types of ~ D. Furthermore, each model type includes a plurality of models having different model names. For example, model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

  In the game control apparatus 100, any one model type among a plurality of model types is set, and any one model name among a plurality of model names included in the model type is set. . The model designation command differs depending on the model type and model name. When the power is turned on, a model designation command corresponding to the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  The effect control device 300 can grasp the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 based on the received model designation command. A default symbol corresponding to the received model designation command is displayed on the display device 41. Thereby, the model type and model name of the said model can be confirmed by confirming the display of the display apparatus 41 at the time of power activation.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, the model designation command is a value indicating that MODE is a model designation command (05H in this case), and ACTION corresponds to the model type and model name. It is the value. For example, when the model type is A and the model name is A-1, a model designation command having MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H is transmitted as a model designation command. Then, in the production control device 300, based on the reception of the model designation command with MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H, it is understood that the model name is A-1 and the model name is A-1, and is displayed on the display device 41 as a default symbol. 131 is displayed.

  In the default symbol, since the upper 2 digits correspond to the model type and the lower 1 digit corresponds to the model name, the model type and model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default symbols are not limited to those shown in FIG. 11 and can be arbitrarily set. However, a symbol that is a combination of reach (for example, 767) or a symbol that is a combination of jackpots (for example, 777) may not be used. The default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game. Further, each or all of the symbols included in the default symbol may be a symbol other than the identification information of the decoration special-figure display game. The default symbol is a symbol corresponding to the model type and model name, but may be a symbol corresponding to only one of the model type and model name.

  Alternatively, the second default symbol may be displayed after the default symbol corresponding to the model type and model name is displayed for a certain period of time. The second default symbol may be anything, but for example, it may be a common symbol regardless of the model type and model name, and the appearance may be the same for gaming machines of the same model but different model types. . Further, the second default symbol may be a symbol common to other models. Moreover, you may enable it to set a 2nd default symbol in an amusement store.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes in the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 13 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the bonus initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), the bonus symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), End the initial value random number update process.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the “big hit initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit of the normal symbol variation display game The “random symbol initial value random number” that is the initial value of the random number is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning stop symbol of the normal figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM.
Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port.

  Next, based on the output data set in various processes, drive control of actuators such as solenoids (lower large prize opening solenoid 38b, upper large prize opening solenoid 39b, general electric solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f) and the like are performed. An output process (step S104) is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed.
Next, whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning port switch 38a, and the upper large winning port switch 39a. And a prize port switch / status monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring such errors and errors (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened).

  Next, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). The abnormal discharge error means that the game ball existing in the upper flow path 38j is zero, but the discharge from the upper flow path 38j is detected, or the game ball existing in the lower flow path 38k is zero. Nevertheless, the discharge from the lower flow path 38k is detected (see FIG. 81). When an abnormal discharge error is occurring, an abnormal discharge error flag is set.

If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.
Further, when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the special figure game process (step S110) for performing the process related to the special figure change display game, and the normal figure game process (step S110) for performing the process related to the normal figure change display game. S111), a segment LED editing process (step S112) is provided (step S112) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and that drives the segment LED that displays various information related to display of special figure variation display games and games.

Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113), a magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 are detected. A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) for performing a process of checking and determining whether there is an abnormality is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S116) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there.
Further, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data has the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and saved to the port input state of the target switch control area. (Store) (step S144). After that, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) to elapse until the second reading (step S145).

When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and the port input state (1 The second data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149).
Thereafter, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step S150). The deterministic bit pattern and the port input state are ANDed to confirm this time. Bits are set (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interruption The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.
Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not there has been a change, in such a case, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the general power solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f are synthesized and output (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. It outputs to 136 (step S166).

  Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, “big hit signal 1” data, “big hit signal 2” data, “big hit signal 3” data, “big hit signal” 4 ”,“ design determination frequency signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and firing permission output data are synthesized (step S170). The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (step S171).
Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided.
The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the 3 prize ball counter area, 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1, respectively. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.
If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . In addition, by outputting the main prize ball signal, when game balls are paid out during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general winning prize port 35, first special variable winning prize device 38, second prize provided in the gaming area 32 is controlled. Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. Have However, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the award corresponding to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39) having different number of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (starting winning port 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including prize ball External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, the payout control means The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, ordinary variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning port 35, A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And It is possible to store the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted by updating at the time of winning a game ball in a predetermined prize area and by updating in accordance with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S214; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.
If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the loaded normal symbol random number is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 20 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (the reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for DRAM refresh or the like. In addition, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number.
Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning port switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning port monitoring table corresponding to a winning port switch (upper university winning port switch 39a) in the upper winning port (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step). S301) An illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the upper winning a prize even though the upper winning award is not open, and to detect a normal winning.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, the monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the illegal winning number area, the illegal winning error notification command, the illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination number) and address information of winning prize switch table are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  After that, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (lower large winning opening switch 38a) in the lower winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. At the same time, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S306) is executed.
A winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36 or the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35) that can always win (Step S307). A winning number counter update process (step S308) is performed to update.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S314). If the value of the state scan counter is not “0” (step S314; N), the process proceeds to step S318. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.
When the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine for judging the state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the detection signal 2 is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the process proceeds to step S318. Note that the processing from step S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

  Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) for monitoring the detection of abnormal input at the probability change operation region switch 38d is performed (step S319), and a remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j (step S319). I do. Further, a discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring the game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. The fraud & winning monitoring process is performed on the lower special prize opening switch 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38, the upper big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable prize winning device 37. This is a process performed on the device. For the big prize opening (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) and ordinary electric (ordinary variable winning device 37), the opening / closing member is forcibly opened and a game ball is inserted to pay out the winning ball. Since fraud is easily performed, fraud is monitored in addition to winning detection.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period in which the flag for lower fraud prize fraud monitoring period is set when the winning prize switch for error monitoring is the lower prize winning switch 38a. When the upper prize winning port switch 39a is set, the flag during the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period is set, and when the prize opening switch subject to error monitoring is the start opening 2 switch 37a, This is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error, but the number of fraud occurrences defines a different number for each kind of winning prize switch. You can also.
The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state or when the ordinary power is converted into a closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the large winning opening or the opening / closing member of the ordinary electric power, and the gaming ball is won This is so that when a winning switch is passed past the effective period of the mouth switch or when a signal is noisy, it is not determined to be illegal, and it is not illegal but is not easily determined as an error.

If the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330).
If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326), and the initial value is stored in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
Then, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S334), and the fraud win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S338).
Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S338).

If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
If the prepared illegal flag and the value of the target illegal flag area do not match (step S338; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S339), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 23 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362).
If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 24 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, and S316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, a target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is on (step S372; Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383).
If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.
If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.
If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S395). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (Step S399).
If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 26 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step S411). The probability variation operating region 38h being active is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operating region switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). When the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. If the probability change operation region 38h is not valid (step S411; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S412).

If there is no input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S412; N), the process proceeds to step S418.
Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S412; Y), processing relating to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error after step S413 is performed. The lever member 38i can flow into the probability changing operation region 38h only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability changing operation region 38h. The period during which the probability change operation region switch 38d is effective is started when the lever member 38i is retracted. The process ends when a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the probability changing operation region 38h. Therefore, when the probability variation operation region switch 38d is not valid, the fact that there is an input to the probability variation operation region switch 38d is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and processing related to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the processing related to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error, first, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60 seconds here) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step S413), and the value in the V abnormal passage flag area is set to the error occurrence flag. (Step S414).
If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurrence flag (step S414; Y), that is, if an error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated.

  If the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not an error occurrence flag (step S414; N), that is, if it is determined that there is an error in the current process, the error occurrence flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area ( Step S415), a V abnormal passage occurrence command is prepared (Step S416). Thereafter, an effect command setting process is performed (step S417), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error in response to reception of the V abnormal passage occurrence command.

On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418).
If the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. In this case, an abnormal V passing error is not occurring.
If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by -1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step S420). ).

If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the V abnormal passage error notification continues.
When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420; Y), a normal flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421), and a V abnormal passage release command is prepared (step S422). . Thereafter, an effect command setting process is performed (step S423), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification with the reception of the V abnormal passage cancellation command.

[Remaining sphere monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step S319) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects a game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S431). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, -1 is updated (step S432), and step S433 is performed. Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S433). If there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. If there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S433; Y), if the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, -1 is updated (step S434). The process proceeds to S435.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step S435). If there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438.
If there is an input to the lower big prize opening switch (step S435; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S436), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is entered. The timer initial value is saved (step S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when the game ball stays in the upper flow path 38j for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the upper flow path 38j after being discharged and set to be discharged is set. Here, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, the value is set so that 3 seconds can be measured by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438). If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, if there is no gaming ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball is counted. An error canceling flag is prepared (step S444), and a remaining ball error cancel command is prepared (step S445). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446).

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the upper flow path 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error has already occurred (step S439). If a remaining sphere error has already occurred (step S439; Y), the remaining sphere monitoring process ends. If no remaining sphere error has already occurred (step S439; N), the remaining sphere monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S440), and it is determined whether the remaining sphere monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

  If the remaining sphere monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining sphere monitoring process is terminated. If the remaining sphere monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), a remaining sphere error occurrence flag is prepared (step S442), and a remaining sphere error occurrence command is prepared (step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446).

If the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446; Y), the remaining sphere monitoring process is terminated.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining sphere error flag area (step S447), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), and the remaining sphere monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on reception of the remaining sphere error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending error notification based on reception of the remaining sphere error release command.

  That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls are not discharged from the upper flow path 38j even after a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) has passed since the last game ball flowed into the upper flow path 38j. A ball error is determined. Thereby, for example, an illegal act of leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread in the upper flow path 38j can be prevented.

[Ejected ball monitoring processing]
FIG. 28 shows the discharged ball monitoring process (step S320) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a game ball discharged from the lower flow path 38k, that is, a game ball discharged from the first special variation winning device 38. (Step S451). When there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; Y), if the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is not 0, -1 is updated (step S452), and step S453 Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S453). If there is no input (step S453; N), the process proceeds to step S456. To do. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S454), and a timer is displayed in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The initial value is saved (step S455), and the process proceeds to step S456.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variation operation region switch 38d that detects the game ball that has flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h (step S456). If there is no input (step S456; N), the process proceeds to step S459. . When there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by 1 (step S457), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is entered. The timer initial value is saved (step S458), and the process proceeds to step S459.

  The passage port switch 38g and the probability change operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting a game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k. Based on the detection of the game ball by these switches, the discharge ball counter is incremented by +1. Update and save the initial timer value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharged ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharged ball error when the game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, the initial value is set to a time sufficiently longer than the time taken from flowing into the lower flow path 38k to being discharged without any abnormality. Here, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, the value is set so that 3 seconds can be measured by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459). If the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, if there is no game ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball counter An error canceling flag is prepared (step S465), and a discharge ball error cancel command is prepared (step S466). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharged ball error flag area (step S467).

  On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the lower flow path 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460). If a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. If no discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S461), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

  If the discharged ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharged ball monitoring process is terminated. If the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and a discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharged ball error flag area (step S467).

If the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharged ball error flag area (step S467; Y), the discharged ball monitoring process is terminated.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step S468), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), the discharged ball monitoring process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error release command.

  That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls are not discharged from the lower flow path 38k even after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the last game ball flowed into the lower flow path 38k, A ball error is determined. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread in the lower flow path 38k.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

Next, an upper prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the upper prize winning port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 is performed.
Further, the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In this lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring detection of a game ball by the lower major prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 is performed.

Thereafter, the probability change operation region switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In this probability change operation region switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the probability change operation region switch 38d provided in the probability change operation region 38h is performed.
Next, a remaining sphere process timer update process (step A5) is performed. In the remaining ball processing timer update processing, processing for managing the big winning opening remaining ball processing time set after the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are closed is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A6). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A7).
When the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A7; Y), that is, when time is up or has already been up, refer to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A8), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A9). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A10).

In step A10, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A11) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “1” in step A10, the special figure changing process for setting the special figure stop display time, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A12) is performed.

  In step A10, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, or the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A13) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

In step A10, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A14) is performed.
If the special figure game process number is “4” in step A10, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A10, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening and the big hit end process are performed. The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step A16) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A10, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A19) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A21) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A22) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A7 (step A7; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A18 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300. Next, a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) is prepared (step A107), and special drawing start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that no power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting hold information by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning of the monitoring target starting port out of the first starting port (starting winning port 36) and the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is displayed. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning with the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and therefore, it is determined that the output count overflows and is not updated.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135).
When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A137), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A138).

  Next, the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A139), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A140), and prepared in step A125. The big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A141). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A142), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A144), and the address of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number Is calculated (step A145), and the target variation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of occurrence, and the special order 1 is used as the variable order flag in the variable order flag storage areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the digest order. Alternatively, the digestion order of the starting memory is managed by storing the information of the special figure 2.
Thereafter, a special figure hold information determination process (step A147) for determining information about the start memory before digesting the start memory is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A147) in the above special figure start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared in order to make a determination based on a determination value in a low-probability state (step A151), and a prefetch jackpot determination process is performed (step A152).
If the result of the pre-reading jackpot determination process is a big hit (step A153; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A154), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142 is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157.
If the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is not big hit (step A153; N), that is, if it is out of place, outage stop symbol information is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

  Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), and a pre-read stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step A158), and an effect command setting process (Step A159). Thereby, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared in order to perform determination based on the determination value in the high probability state (step A160), and prefetching jackpot determination processing is performed (step A161).
If the result of the pre-reading jackpot determination process is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142 is set. Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166.
If the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is not big hit (step A162; N), that is, if it is out of place, outage stop symbol information is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

Then, it is determined whether or not a special figure high probability (high probability state) is in effect (step A166). If it is not in a special figure high probability (step A166; N), the process proceeds to step A168. If the special symbol high probability is present (step A166; Y), the stopped symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
Thereafter, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A169). Thereby, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (step A170), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step A171). Thereafter, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game are prepared (step A172), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A173), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that as the prefetch stop symbol command, commands corresponding to the determination result in the low probability state and the determination result in the high probability state are transmitted. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the apparatus 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the decoration special figure start memory display unit 42 of the center case 40, etc., from the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the prefetching jackpot determination process (steps A152 and A161) in the above special figure hold information determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the look-ahead jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A181), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182; Y), the deviation is set as the determination result (step A187), and the prefetch big hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A182; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination (step A183).

If the determination flag is high probability determination (step A183; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value. (Step A186).
When the determination flag is not a high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, when the determination flag is a low probability determination flag, an upper limit determination value during a low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step A186).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A186; Y), the deviation is set as the determination result (step A187), and the prefetch big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A186; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A188), and the prefetch big hit determination process is terminated.

[Monitoring process for the upper prize winning switch]
Next, details of the upper prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the top prize winning port switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the big prize opening opening process is in progress (step A191). ). When the special winning opening is being opened (step A191; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S191). A192).

  When the winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. Further, when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A192; N), the upper winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. Since the special figure game process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

  Then, it is determined whether the upper prize winning opening is in operation (step A193). When the upper prize winning port is in operation, there is a possibility that the second special variable winning device 39 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting a win includes a predetermined period after the open / close door 39c is activated and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and after the open state is converted to a closed state. . If the upper prize winning opening is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. If the upper prize winning opening is operating (step A193; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 39a (step A194).

If there is no input to the upper prize winning opening switch (step A194; N), the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (step A194; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step A195), and an effect command setting process (step A196) is performed. As a result, the production control device 300 can execute the production according to the winning of the second special variation winning device 39.
Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being opened (step A197). If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A197; N), the upper prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the special winning opening is being opened (step A197; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A198), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (can be won in one round). It is determined whether the number of game balls (for example, “9”) or more is reached (step A199).

If the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A199; N), the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; Y), the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed and one round is completed.

[Shimodai prize exit switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the big prize opening is being opened (step A201). ). When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).

  When the big winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. In addition, when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), the lower winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. Since the special figure game process number does not move to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the lower prize winning opening is in operation (step A203). The operation of the lower large prize opening is a state in which there is a possibility that the first special variable prize winning device 38 may detect a prize. The possibility of detecting a win includes not only the open state in which the open / close door 38c is activated and the game ball can be won, but also a predetermined period after the open state is converted to the closed state. . If the lower major prize opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the lower major prize opening is operating (step A203; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 38a (step A204).

If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch (step A204; N), the lower major prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step A204; Y), a big prize mouth count command is prepared (step A205), and an effect command setting process (step A206) is performed. As a result, the production control device 300 can execute the production according to the winning of the first special variation winning device 38.
Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being opened (step A207). If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A207; N), the lower prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the special winning opening is being opened (step A207; Y), the winning prize count is incremented by one (step A208), and the special winning prize count is the upper limit (a single round can be won). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls (for example, “9”) or more is reached (step A209).

When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A209; N), the lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210), and the hit end pointer value from the special figure end pointer area is cleared. Is saved in the control pointer area per special figure (step A211), and the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and one round is completed.

[Probability switching area monitoring process]
Next, details of the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process (step A4) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probability change operation region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability change operation region 38h is valid (step A221). The probability variation operating region 38h being active is a state in which detection of a game ball by the probability variation operating region switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). When the probability variation operation region 38h is not valid (step A221; N), the probability variation operation region switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the probability changing operation region 38h is valid (step A221; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability changing operation region switch 38d (step A222).

If there is no input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step A222; N), the probability change operation region switch monitoring process is terminated.
If there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step A222; Y), a probability change operation region passage command is prepared (step A223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A224). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the game ball flowing into the probability changing operation region 38h.

  Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A225). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 4R probability variation. In the case of big hits with these symbols, the lower V is released, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal which is not an easy V symbol, the lower short is released, so that the game ball rarely flows into the probability changing operation region 38h.

When the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A225; Y), the probability variation operation region normal passage information is set (step A226), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A228). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A225; N), the probability variation operation region irregular passage information is set (step A227), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operation region passage information region (step A229). ), The probability variation operating region switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Remaining ball processing timer update processing]
Next, details of the remaining ball processing timer update process (step A5) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the remaining ball processing timer update processing, first, the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer for managing the upper ball winning port remaining ball processing time, which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Is 0 (step A231).

When the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A231; Y), that is, when the upper special winning opening residual ball processing time is not remaining, which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Shifts to Step A235.
Further, when the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A231; N), that is, when the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing time is in progress, the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 ( Step A232), it is determined whether or not the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A233).

When the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A233; N), the process proceeds to step A235.
If the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A233; Y), a setting at the end of the upper prize winning ball remaining ball processing time is performed (step A234). In the setting at the end of the processing time of the upper prize winning ball remaining, the special electric player 1 operation signal is set to OFF, the upper prize winning opening release flag is cleared, and the flag during the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period is saved. To do.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer for managing the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the first special variable winning device 38 is 0 (step A235).
If the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A235; N), that is, if the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is being processed, the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether or not the lower grand prize winning port remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (Step A237).

If the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A237; N), the remaining ball processing timer update processing is terminated.
Further, when the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A237; Y), the setting at the end of the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time is performed (step A238). In the setting at the end of the processing time of the remaining ball at the lower prize winning opening, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF, the lower winning prize opening state flag is cleared, and the flag during illegal monitoring of the lower prize winning opening is saved. To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239). If the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer update processing is terminated. The lever solenoid being stopped is a state that is set when the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except for the first round, that is, when the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state. In this case, the lever solenoid 38f does not operate after the remaining ball processing time elapses, and therefore processing relating to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f after the remaining ball processing time elapses is not performed.

If the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the remaining ball monitoring operation in-progress information is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240), and it is determined whether the remaining ball number is 0 (step A242). ).
If the number of remaining spheres is not zero (step A242; N), the remaining sphere processing timer update process is terminated. In this case, the remaining ball monitoring operation of the lever solenoid is maintained.

  If the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid at the time of the remaining ball monitoring is set (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the time of the remaining ball monitoring end, the stopping information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the stopping value is saved in the control pointer of the lever solenoid control area. Also, the control timer area in the lever solenoid control area is cleared to zero.

On the other hand, if the lower big prize opening remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, if the lower big prize opening remaining ball processing time has already ended, the lever solenoid is in the remaining ball monitoring operation. (Step A241).
When the lever solenoid is not in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer update process is terminated.
When the lever solenoid is in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y), the process proceeds to step A242. In this case, when the number of remaining balls becomes 0 (step A242; Y), the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring (step A243) is performed, and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f ends.

  With the above processing, the upper major winning opening remaining ball processing time and the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time are managed. The timer for managing the upper ball winning ball remaining ball processing time and the lower University winning ball remaining ball processing time is a timer different from the special game processing timer in order to manage at least the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to manage the upper ball winning opening remaining ball processing time and the lower winning ball remaining ball processing time in parallel with the progress of the special gaming state. That is, while managing the opening of one special variable winning device, it is possible to manage the large winning opening remaining ball processing time of the other special variable winning device.

  If one special figure game processing timer is used to control the interval time and the subsequent winning prize remaining ball processing time with one special figure game processing timer, the special figure game processing timer manages the interval time after managing the openable time in the round. After that, since the management of the winning ball remaining ball processing time is performed to manage the time available for opening the next round, the time between rounds becomes long. If an attempt is made to shorten the time between rounds, the time for processing the remaining ball in the big prize opening is also shortened, so that it is likely that the regular winning is treated as invalid. In order to prevent such a situation, conversely, if the extra winning opening remaining ball processing time is lengthened, there is a problem that the time between rounds becomes longer and the digestion speed in the special gaming state is sacrificed.

  In addition, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is always possible to ensure a sufficiently long upper large winning port remaining ball processing time and a lower large winning port remaining ball processing time. It becomes possible to do. Then, after the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing time, the fraud monitoring period is set until the special variable winning device that is the target of the winning ball remaining ball processing time is opened. Even if there is an act of illegally winning a game ball with respect to the special variable winning device that maintains the closed state after the end of the ball processing time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. Game control means (game control device 100), a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can win And the game control means opens one of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 in each round in a special game state composed of a plurality of rounds. By changing the special variable winning device that is opened every round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled so as to be alternately opened every round. Based on the completion of the opening in the round, the control is performed so as to start the processing time for processing the remaining winning ball in the special winning opening which treats the detection of the game ball flowing into the special variable winning device opened in the round as a normal winning game, The processing time is measured by a timer different from at least a timer (special game processing timer) for managing the opening time of the special variable winning device in the special gaming state.

  Therefore, since the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is possible to secure a large winning port remaining ball processing time for the closed special variable winning device, and a large winning port remaining ball. Since the processing time and the opening time of the special variable winning device are managed independently, it is possible to appropriately manage the remaining winning ball remaining ball processing time for the other special variable winning device while one special variable winning device is opened and closed It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the special variable winning device.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) is configured to perform the process from the end of the big winning opening remaining ball processing time until the special variable winning apparatus targeted for the big winning opening remaining ball processing time is released. This means that the winning to the special variable winning device is invalidated. Therefore, fraudulent acts during the special game state can be prevented.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are “0”. (Step A301). If both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are not "0" (step A301; N), that is, if at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the change order flag A flag is loaded from the storage area (for the total number of holdings 1) (step A302), and it is determined whether the fluctuation is that shown in FIG. 1 (step A303).

  If the special figure 1 fluctuation (step A303; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 information is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1), the special figure 1 holding number is set. A corresponding decoration special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and an effect command setting process (step A305) is performed. At this time, since the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the current special figure 1 hold number-1 value is prepared. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the information of special figure 2 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1), it corresponds to the number of holdings of special figure 2 A decoration special figure hold number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), and an effect command setting process (step A308) is performed. At this time, since the special figure 2 hold number is not subtracted, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the current special figure 2 hold number-1 value is prepared. Then, the special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  If both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A310). If it has been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.

  Next, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A314), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A315). Step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A318). Normal processing ends.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). Next, a game frequency command corresponding to the value of the game frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A323).

  After that, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) is performed for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. Next, after the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed, the special symbol which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A326) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A327). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A329) is performed.

  Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A330), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A332), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. 100 ms) is set here (step A335), an initial value (0 in this case) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A336), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 41, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). Next, a game frequency command corresponding to the value of the game frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A343). After that, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step A343) is performed for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A346) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A347). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A348) for setting a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information of variation start of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A349) is performed.

  Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A350), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A352), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A354), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. 100 ms) is set here (step A355), an initial value (0 in this case) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A356), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area is 0, whereby variation display is started from a state in which all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A362), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A363). Note that “for the number of reservations 1” is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the first special figure 1 start memory in the special figure 1 in the digestion order. Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A364) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A344) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A373). In addition, the number for the holding number 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the first special figure 2 start memory in the special figure 2 in the digestion order. Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383). If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407). Any of 12R, 5R, and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area.
Then, the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special winning opening release information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. The special winning opening information is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A409), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A410), the process proceeds to Step A411. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A411), the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A412), and an effect command setting process (step A413) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A414), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A415). The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437). Any of 12R, 5R, and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area.
Then, the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the special winning opening release information area (step A438), and the process proceeds to step A441. The special winning opening information is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A440), and the process proceeds to Step A441. Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

Thereafter, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A441), the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A442), and an effect command setting process (step A443) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A444), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A445). The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A326, A346) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step A452). . Note that the probability state is one of three states: a low probability state and not a time-short state, a high probability state and a time-short state, a low probability state and a time-short state. Also, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a missing symbol (step A453). If it is not a missing symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, a pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( Step A455), the special figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the symbol is an outlier symbol (step A453; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 hold count and the special figure 2 hold count (step A454). The pointer is saved in the area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
That is, when the result is a big hit, the variation pattern is selected without considering the number of start memories, and when the result is out of order, the variation pattern is selected while considering the number of start memories. In step A454, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the processing target is Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 and the current presentation mode.

For example, when the production mode is the normal mode and the processing target is special figure 1, the variable group is selected in consideration of whether the total number of holdings is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4-8 Update the pointer. Further, when the effect mode is the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of holdings.
And when the production mode is other than the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of the pending numbers, and the production mode is other than the normal mode. When the processing target is FIG. 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the total number of holds is 0 to 1, 2 to 8.
It should be noted that the total number of holdings is 0 when there is no starting memory (during a customer waiting demo) and the starting memory is generated and the special figure variation display game is started, and the total number of holdings is 1 Is a case where the special figure variation display game is started with one start-up memory.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A171, A328, and A348) at the start of special figure 2 fluctuation will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step A461), the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A462), The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A463).

  Then, a 2-byte distribution process (step A464) is performed to acquire and prepare the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (step A465), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (reserved number) 1) is loaded and prepared (step A466). Then, a sorting process (step A467) is performed, the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the fluctuation pattern number area, and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated. With this process, the variation pattern of the special-figure variation display game such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 49 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step A464) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data of the selection table (the fluctuation group table prepared in step A462) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A471). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern selection table, but the variation group table defines only the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of (for example, a part of the variation group table in the case where the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data of the selection table (variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A472; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step A477), and 2 bytes are distributed. The process ends.
On the other hand, when the top data of the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A472; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A473).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A473 from the random value prepared in Step A463 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (Step A474), and the calculated new random value It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A475).
If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A475; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A476), the process proceeds to step A473, and thereafter Process. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variation group table) is obtained (step A473), and then the new random value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A475. A numerical value is calculated (step A474), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A475).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A475; Y). Thus, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
If it is determined in step A475 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A475; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A477), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

  Note that the distribution process in step A467 in the above-described variation pattern setting process is the same process as the above-described 2-byte distribution process. However, the program instructions for calculation differ in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A329 and A349) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are cleared (step A491).
Next, a variation time value table is set (step A492), a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern number is acquired and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A493). Thereafter, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared (step A494), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A495).

  Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A496), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A497). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A498), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A499). Then, the fluctuation order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A501), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern is cited, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure changing process, first, as information for stopping the change display, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S601). A602).
Next, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set as 2000 ms. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Thereafter, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).
Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A607), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design) (2 change signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initially set in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A609).

  After that, as information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610), as information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. (Step A611), the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A13) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process Is loaded (step A701), and the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area are cleared (step A702).
Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A703). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A706). A round number upper limit value table is set (step A707).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A703 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A703; N) as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A704) and a big hit (step A703). When A704; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A705), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in this embodiment, any one of 12, 5 or 4) is acquired, Save in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A708). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A710), and an effect command setting process (step A711) is performed.
Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of a hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A713) is performed.
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process (step A715) is performed.

  Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). Thereafter, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (in this case, either 100 ms, 2500 ms or 500 ms) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A718), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A719). ) To finish the special figure display process. In other words, the game control device 100 has either a first special variable winning device 38 or a second special variable winning device based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the device 39 into an open state is provided.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A704 (step A704; N), the time reduction variation frequency update process (step A720) for managing the period of the high probability state or the short time state is performed to set the production mode. A special figure game information check process (step A721) is performed. Next, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A722), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A723), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A723). Step A724) The special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation frequency update process (step A720) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the time shortening variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in a short time (in a short time state) (step A751). If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step A751; N), the time-reduced variation number of times update processing is terminated. If the special figure time is short (step A751; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A752). If it is not in the special figure high probability (step A752; N), the process proceeds to step A757. If the special figure has a high probability (step A752; Y), the high probability variation count is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the high probability variation count is "0" (step A754). ).

  When the number of high probability fluctuations is not “0” (step A754; N), the process proceeds to step A757. Also, when the high probability change count becomes “0” (step A754; Y), that is, when the high probability state ends in this special figure change display game, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A755), the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A756), and the process proceeds to step A757. Note that the information in the probability variation operating area passage information area is cleared by this processing or by turning on the gaming machine.

  Next, the time shortening fluctuation count is updated by −1 (step A757), and it is determined whether the time shortening fluctuation count is “0” (step A758). If the time shortening variation count is not “0” (step A758; N), the time shortening variation count updating process is terminated. Further, when the time shortening variation count becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time-short state ends in the current special figure variation display game, a signal relating to the time-short end (for example, 2 signals of big hits are turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, both the high probability state and the short time state are ended by executing the same number of special figure variation display games, so when the high probability variation number becomes zero. The number of time shortening fluctuations is also 0, so that the high probability state and the short time state end simultaneously. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol is turned off. 1 Set the high probability state signal to OFF. Even when the special figure is in a high probability state, the normal figure only changes in the probability state, so that the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF.

  Next, a number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A761), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the usual figure game mode flag area (step A762), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A763). Further, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A764), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is displayed. In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A765), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Information Check Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game information check process (step A721) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special figure game information check process, it is first determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771).
When the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the special figure game information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the number of games that can be executed in the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by -1 (step A772). It is determined whether the number of times has become “0” (step A773). If the number of games is not “0” (step A773; N), the special figure game information check process is terminated. When the number of games becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the number of games in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the game number area in the RWM. (Step A778), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (Step A779).
Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A780), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A781), and an effect command setting process ( Step A782) is performed.

  Next, a game number command corresponding to the newly set game number is prepared (step A783), an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed, and the special figure game information check process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A719) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

Next, signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). Even when the special figure is in a high probability state, the normal figure only changes in the probability state, so that the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF.
Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A794), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A795), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A796).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A797), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 78) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. The area is cleared (step A798), and the special figure low probability & short time none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

  Next, the high probability variation count area for managing the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in a high probability state is cleared to 0 (step A800), and the number of special figure change display games that can be executed in a short time state is managed. The time shortening variation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A802), the game number area is cleared to 0 (step A803), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A804). After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A805). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained. Further, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 77) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, it is determined whether or not the start of an odd round, which is a round that opens the first special variable winning device 38 (step A851), and the odd round is not started. (Step A851; N), that is, in the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the process proceeds to Step A853. If it is the start of an odd round (step A851; Y), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is 0 ( Step A852).

  If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A852; N), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, if the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the game ball remains in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball may flow into the probability variation operation region 38h. In particular, immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, a game ball tends to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h, and therefore, there is a very high possibility that a high probability state will occur. For this reason, if there is a remaining ball in the upper flow path 38j, that is, if there is a game ball that may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h that forms a specific region in the first special variation winning device 38, the probability variation is concerned. It is made to wait for the start of the round which opens the 1st special variation prize-winning device 38 until it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may flow into operation field 38h. In the case of an even-numbered round in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of a game ball in the second special variable winning device 39.

If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A852; Y), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A853), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S852). A854), effect command setting processing (step A855) is performed.
After that, the big prize opening release table is set (step A856), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the big prize opening information and the number of rounds is acquired and saved (step A857). The big prize opening release data is data indicating which one of the first special variable prize-winning device 38 and the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is opened, and an opening mode such as an opening time.

  Then, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A858). (Step A858; Y), the process proceeds to Step A863. If it is not the final round (step A858; N), it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step A859). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i. In this embodiment, only the first specific round is used.

  If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A859; Y), the lever solenoid operation data is set (step A860), and the process proceeds to step A863. As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

  If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step A859; N), it is determined whether the odd-numbered round is started (step A861). If not the odd-numbered round is started (step A861; N), the process proceeds to step A863. . In this case, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. When the odd-numbered round is started (step A861; Y), the lever solenoid stop data is set (step A862), and the process proceeds to step A863. In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated.

  After that, the big prize opening time corresponding to the big prize opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A863), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the big prize opening data is acquired and hitting the special figure. Save in the control pointer area (step A864). Further, a hit end pointer value corresponding to the big prize opening release data is acquired and saved in the special pointer end pointer area (step A865), and it is determined whether the odd number round is started (step A867).

  If it is not the start of the odd round (step A867; N), the special winning opening open process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated. If it is the start of an odd round (step A867; Y), the special winning opening open process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

  In step A852, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A853 is not performed. Anyway. That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 have been discharged.

  As described above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. A game control means (game control device 100) and a specific area (in which a game ball can flow into the inside, which can be converted into a closed state where a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state where a game ball can win a game) A first special variable prize-winning device 38 having a probability changing operation area 38h), a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a special game state, and an open state in which a game ball can be won; 2 special variation winning device 39, and the game control means is based on the fact that the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific region, and the game control means does not flow into the specific region. A gaming state advantageous to the player can occur after the end of the special gaming state. In a special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are provided in each round. And the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to be alternately opened every round by changing the special variable winning device that is opened every round. When starting the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area in the first special variable winning device 38. It means waiting for the start of the round.

  Therefore, since it waits for the start of the round which opens the 1st special variation prize-winning apparatus 38 until it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may flow into a specific field, fairness of a game can be secured. .

  In addition, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts a round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the second special variation winning device 39 are discharged. Regardless of whether or not it is to start the round. Therefore, when opening the second special variable winning device 39 that does not include the specific area, the special game state can be quickly digested because it is opened without confirming the discharge.

  In step A851, it may be determined whether or not the specific round is started, and it may be confirmed whether or not the remaining sphere counter is 0 only when the specific round is started. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result (Game control device 100) and a specific region (probability change operation region) that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win, 38h), and a second special variation that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and does not have a specific area. And the game control means is based on the fact that the game ball that has won the first special variable prize-winning device 38 flows into the specific area, and the game control means plays a game more than when the game ball does not flow into the specific area. Can be generated after the end of the special gaming state. In a special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are used in each round. While either one is opened and the special variable winning device that is opened for each round is changed, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to open alternately for each round. In the special gaming state, the first special variable winning device 38 is controlled to be executed a plurality of rounds, and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round among the plurality of rounds. It is configured to determine whether or not the game ball that has flowed into the special variation winning device 38 has flowed into the specific area, and when starting the specific round, The game balls that may be flowing into the specific region in the device 38 is not present may be waiting for the start of the specific round until acknowledged. By doing so, the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, in step A851, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the specific round or the first special variable winning device 38 that is opened next to the specific round, and whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 only at the start of these rounds. You may make it confirm. That is, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts a round in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened after the specific round, the game control means (game control device 100) has a specific area (probability changing operation) in the first special variable winning device 38. You may make it wait for the start of the said round until it is confirmed that there is no game ball which may flow into area | region 38h). In this way, since it waits until it is determined whether or not the game ball that has flowed in the specific round has flowed into the specific area, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the round is waited. However, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special gaming state may be waited. In other words, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball that may flow into a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38 when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. You may make it wait for the start of a special game state until it is confirmed. Therefore, the first special variation winning device 38 is not released until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

  Further, when it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 other than the specific round, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in the round. Also good. Further, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round in which the specific round is other than the first round and the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (it may be only at the start of the specific round) A plurality of consecutive rounds immediately before the specific round may wait for the start and may be rounds for releasing the second special variable winning device 39. By doing in this way, sufficient time can be ensured before the start of a specific round, and it can be set as the state by which the residual ball | bowl was discharged | emitted reliably. Furthermore, a plurality of consecutive rounds immediately after the specific round may be rounds that open the second special variable winning device 39.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A868). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A871), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A872).
After that, the information on the area for counting the number of winning prizes for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A873), and a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening (for example, the signal for operating the special electric accessory 1 is ON) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

Then, the upper prize winning port ON data is saved in the special prize opening solenoid output data area (step A875), and the upper big prize opening operating information is saved in the upper prize winning state flag area (step A876).
Next, the upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A877), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper university winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step A878), and the upper university winning mouth remaining ball is saved. The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening is completed.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A869). In the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special prize opening opening process (step A 881), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A882).
After that, the information on the area for the number of the big prize winning counts for storing the number of winning prizes at the big prize winning opening is cleared (step A883), and the signal related to the opening of the lower prize winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned on) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A884).

Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the lower big prize opening operating information is saved in the lower big prize opening state flag area (step A886).
Next, the lower prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A887), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower major winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step A888). The process timer area is cleared to 0 (step A 889), and the process for setting a process for setting a special prize opening is completed.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A15) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special winning opening opening process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening information is a pattern for opening and closing (step A901). The pattern that opens and closes is an opening pattern that opens and closes during one round, and in this embodiment is a lower V opening (see FIG. 8).
If the winning opening data is a pattern for opening and closing (step A901; Y), the control pointer is loaded and prepared per special figure (step A902), and the loaded value is greater than or equal to the end pointer value per special figure. It is determined whether it exists (step A903).

  When the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; N), that is, when the opening / closing operation is still performed in the currently executed round, the value of the middle control pointer area per special figure is incremented by +1. It is updated (step A904), a big hit movement transition setting process is performed (step A905), and the big winning opening opening process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the big hit operation transition setting process, a branch process using the middle control pointer per special figure is performed (step A921).
When the value of the control pointer per special figure is 0, the wait time (2700 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A922), and the first special variable winning device 38 is closed. Next, the lower big prize opening off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A923), and the big hit action transition setting process is completed.

  If the value of the control pointer during special figure is 1, the big special V second half opening time (25000 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A924), and the first special variable winning device 38 is In order to enter the open state, the lower big prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A925), and the big hit action transition setting process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 59, when the special winning opening data is not a pattern for opening and closing (step A901; N), or when the loaded value is greater than or equal to the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; Y), The current round number in the special gaming state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A906).

  If it is not the final round (step A906; N), the winning opening opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, 300ms, 900ms, or 1300ms) are saved in the special game processing timer area ( Step A907), an interval command is prepared (Step A908), and an effect command setting process is performed (Step A909). Further, the process number is set to “3” for the fanfare / interval process (step A910), and the process proceeds to step A915.

  In the case of the final round (step A906; Y), the remaining ball processing time (in this case, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the big opening opening data is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A911). ), An ending command is prepared (step A912), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A913). Furthermore, the processing number is set to “5” for the winning ball remaining ball processing (step A914), and the process proceeds to step A915.

  Then, the big winning opening remaining ball processing time corresponding to the big winning opening release data and the number of rounds is saved in the big winning opening remaining ball processing timer area (step A915). In this process, if the round to be finished is a round for opening the first special variable winning device 38, the initial value of the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area. When the round to be finished is a round for releasing the second special variable winning device 39, the initial value of the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing timer area.

  Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A916), and the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. The off data for turning off the winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A917), and the large winning opening releasing process is terminated. In step A917, the off data of the lower prize winning solenoid 38b and the upper prize winning solenoid 39b are set. However, only the off data of the big prize opening solenoid of the special variable winning device being opened is set. You may do it.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 is zero ( In step A951), if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951; N), the winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated. In other words, the process does not shift from the big winning opening remaining ball processing until all the game balls in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, so that the special gaming state is not terminated.

  If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A951; Y), “6” is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A952), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A952). Step A953). After that, the ending time (in this case, either 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening release data is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A954).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning-outs to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A955), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A956). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A957). Then, the information of the special winning opening release information area for storing the special winning opening release information determination flag is cleared (step A956), and the control pointer area is cleared per special figure (step A957). The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

  From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) may flow into the specific region (probability variation operation region 38h) in the first special variation winning device 38 when ending the special game state. This means that the special game state is not terminated until it is confirmed that there is no ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining until the next special game state, and to ensure the fairness of the game. In step A951, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A952 is not performed. May be. That is, the special game state may be terminated after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the big hit ending process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1001), and this special game state is based on a hit with high probability and short time. (Step A1002).
When the special game state this time is not based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A1002; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003). The V easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 4R probability variation.

When the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A1003; N), information on the start of the short time mode B is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
In addition, when the special game state this time is based on a hit with a high probability & short time (step A1002; Y), or when the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), the special game Information on the start of the time reduction mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

Then, it is determined whether there is probability change operation region passage information set when a game ball flows into the probability change operation region 38h (step A1006).
When there is no probability change operation region passage information (step A1006; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, the high probability state is not obtained.
Also, if there is probability variation operating area passage information (step A1006; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1008), and the information prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is set to the ST mode (ST mode A Or it replaces with B) (step A1009), and transfers to step A1010. In this case, a high probability state is obtained. That is, when a game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h regardless of the big hit symbol, a high probability state is set.

  Thereafter, an effect mode information address table is set (step A1010), and an address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is acquired (step A1011). Then, from this information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1012), and the number of games of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved ( Step A1013), the next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved (Step A1014). Furthermore, a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1016).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change operation region irregular passing, which is the inflow of the game ball into the probability change operation region 38h in the special game state based on the big hit symbol which is not the V easy symbol (step A1017). Then, when the probability variation operating region is not irregularly passed (step A1017; N), the process proceeds to step A1019. If the probability variation operating region is irregular passing (step A1017; Y), the irregularity variation information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step A1019), and a probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands that include production mode information in either “high probability / short time” or “low probability / short time”, and the probability variable operation region passes irregularly. In the case of, irregular probability variation information is added.
Then, a game number command corresponding to the number of games is prepared (step A1020), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A1021).

Next, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1022), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1023).
After that, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1024). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1025).

  Subsequently, the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1026), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1027). The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information in the probability changing operation area passing information area is cleared (step A1029), the information in the special-purpose game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1030), and the big hit ending process is ended.

  When the special game state this time is based on the high probability state or the short time state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode regardless of the presence / absence of the probability variation operation region passage information. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in the first special figure variation display game, it becomes a V easy symbol with a predetermined probability, and when a big hit is made in the second special figure fluctuation display game, all are V easy symbols. Become. In the high probability state or in the short time state, the game proceeds with a right-hand hit, so basically only the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, and all the big hits in the high probability state and the short time state are V easy symbols. Should be. However, if a big hit is made in the first special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory that existed when the big hit occurred, the V easy symbol does not become a predetermined rate even though it is in a high probability state or a short time state. Sometimes.

  Players who are not familiar with game content may understand that all jackpots during high-probability and short-time states will be V easy symbols, and may have distrust of not being in ST mode. Such a distrust can be prevented by making a transition to the ST mode in the case of a big hit during a high probability state or a short time state. Since the ST mode is terminated without generating a big hit at a predetermined rate even in a high probability state, even if the ST mode is set in a low probability state, the ST mode does not cause a big hit, and thus the ST mode is uncomfortable. Will not occur.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 63 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1007) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of a short time (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041). Since the signal related to the start of time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Next, a signal related to the start of low probability & short time (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

  Next, a number with a short time is saved in the game state display number area (step A1043), a high probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1044), and the special game mode flag area is specially saved. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A1045). Thereafter, the high probability variation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction variation count area (step A1047), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1008) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of a short time (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051). Since the signal related to the start of time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Next, a signal related to the start of high probability & short time (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time The shortened state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1052).

  Next, a number with a short time is saved in the game state display number area (step A1053), a high probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1054), and a special game mode flag area is specially saved. The flag with high probability & short time is saved (step A1055). Thereafter, the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1056), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time shortening variation number area (step A1057), and the jackpot end setting is set. Processing 2 ends. Note that while the game is progressing by right-handed during the short-running state, it is instructed to right-hand from the special gaming state, so in the big hit end setting processes 1 and 2, settings relating to instructing right-handed are performed. Absent.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (short-time state) over a predetermined period after the special game state ends. Then, in the specific gaming state, the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled so as to make it easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state, and more than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. The variation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure fluctuation display game is configured to be shortened.
In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a high probability state generating means capable of generating a high probability state (probability variation state) over a predetermined period after the special game state ends.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
Next, details of the lever solenoid control process (step A22) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the lever solenoid control process, it is first determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (-1 in this case) (step A1101). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no-update code (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A1103). .

  If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A1103; N), the lever solenoid control process is terminated. When the lever solenoid control timer reaches 0 (step A1103; Y), a lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and a table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1105). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1106), the control timer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control timer area (step A1107), and the output of the next action is output. Data is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A1109), and the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

  With the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, and the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON / OFF as shown in FIGS. The validity / invalidity of the switch 38d is set. When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, −1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 67 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A19 and A21) in the above-described special-figure game process and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the normal game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14.
Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) corresponding to the target flashing control timer area is saved (step A2106). The variable symbol number of the control target is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number region of the control target is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the ordinary game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed.
Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

After that, after preparing a general symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 74 (step B14), the symbol variation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol indicator 74 ( Step B15) is performed and the usual game process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101).
If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state is a right-handed game (for example, during a big hit, during special drawing time shortage (during normal power support)) (step B102). .

When the game state is a right-handed game (step B102; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than an upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of holdings of the ordinary map is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, it is during the ordinary figure, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in the winning state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. It is determined whether or not there is (step B201).
Then, when it is normal (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the hit end pointer value (in this case, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal pointer end pointer area and saved in the normal pointer pointer control area (step B205). Then, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

  Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal map is not being reached (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the usual figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B301). If the number of usual figure holds is “0” (step B301; Y) ) Sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B322), and saves the process number in the normal figure game process number area (step B323). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing is terminated.

  In addition, when the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1). The per-random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the per-symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, it is determined whether the probability of the hit result in the normal variation display game is in the high probability of being higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability of normal error), that is, in the short time state. (Step B303).

If the ordinary figure is not in high probability (step B303; N), a lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of ordinary figure low probability is set (step B304), and if the ordinary figure is in high probability (step B303). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306). If the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), that is, if it is out of step, step B308 Migrate to

If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307).
If the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is a miss, the slip information is saved in the hit flag area (step B308), and the slipping stop symbol number is set (step B309). ), The off symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

  On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311). A winning stop symbol number corresponding to the winning symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), and the stopping symbol information corresponding to the stopping symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stopping symbol information area (step B313), The number is saved in the usual figure stop symbol area (step B314). Note that in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols: a hit symbol 1 that becomes an open pattern 1 and a hit symbol 2 that becomes an open pattern 2.

  In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”. Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set and saved in the usual game process timer area (step B320). Here, as the variation time, 500 ms is selected at 200/256, 1500 ms is selected at 40/256, and 3000 ms is selected at 16/256.
After that, a normal chart transition process transition setting process (step B321) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 72 shows a process for setting a transition to a normal map change process (step B321) in the normal map normal process described above. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B341). Step B342).
After that, a signal related to the start of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 variation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343) to indicate that the universal variation display game is changing. The changing flag is saved in the usual figure change control flag area (step B344).

  Then, the flashing control timer initial value (100 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the general-purpose display 74, is saved in the general-purpose flashing control timer area (step B345), and is initially stored in the general-purpose variable symbol number area. The value (here, 0) is saved (step B346), and the processing for setting the transition to the normal fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the process for changing the normal map, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying the normal map (step B411), and the process number is set to the normal game process number. Save in the area (step B412).
After that, the normal time display time (for example, 600 milliseconds) which is the display time of the result of the normal time fluctuation display game on the normal time display 74 is saved in the normal time game processing timer area (step B413), A signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the usual figure fluctuation display game is stopped is entered in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B415), and the process during normal map change ends.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the processing for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

  If the win flag is not hit information (step B503; N), “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B515), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B516). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal diagram display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the hit start pointer value (here, 0 and 5) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information is set. Is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B505). Next, a hit end pointer value (in this case, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the usual figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the usual figure end pointer area (step B506), and corresponds to the usual figure stop symbol information. The normal power open time (in this case, either 1700 ms or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B507).

Thereafter, “3” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal game process (step B508), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B509). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal signal (for example, a normal signal per normal symbol ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal ON) are entered in the test signal output data area. Save (step B510).
Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, on-data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B511), and the ordinary electric power count number for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is stored. The information on the area is cleared (step B512), and the information on the illegal power prize winning area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (the fraud monitoring out-of-flight monitoring period flag) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the normal diagram is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the normal processing per normal map, first, the control pointer during normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during normal map is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during normal maps is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during normal maps is updated by +1 (step B603), and the power transmission operation transition setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map.
Also, if the value of the control pointer during normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the process shifts to normal operation without performing the process of updating the normal process control pointer area by 1 in step B603. A setting process (step B604) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 76 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal process. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (medium control pointer per normal figure). I am doing so. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611). Note that the value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601 and the value before +1 update in step B603.

  If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2 or 5, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is blocked. The later wait time (300 ms in this case) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), and the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (step B613). Then, the ordinary electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is released. The time of normal power release (1700 ms in this case) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and on data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general power solenoid 37c ( Step B615), the normal operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is 6, the process proceeds to step B616 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the ordinary power that is the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is The opening time (here, 2600 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B616), and the on-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B617) to turn on the general-purpose solenoid 37c. The electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B618 to complete the open control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process. “4” is set (step B618). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B619), and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing time (600 ms in this case) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B620). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B621), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 77 shows the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 controlled by the above-described processing. FIG. 77 (a) shows a case where the result is hit symbol 1 (open pattern 1). When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends (t81) and the normal figure display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t82), the winning state is started and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened.

  In the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, opening for 1700 ms (t82 to t83, t84 to t85, t86 to t87) and closing for 300 ms (t83 to t84, t85 to t86) are performed alternately. When the third release is completed (t87), the remaining ball processing time is 600 ms (t87 to t88), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t88 to t89). When the ending time is over (t89), the hit state is over, and a new custom fluctuation display game can be executed.

FIG. 77 (b) shows a case where the result is a winning pattern 2 (open pattern 2). When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends (t91) and the normal figure display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t92), the winning state is started and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened.
In the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, the opening of 2600 ms (t92 to t93, t94 to t95) is performed with the closing of 300 ms (t93 to t94). When the second opening is completed (t95), the remaining ball processing time is 600 ms (t95 to t96), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t96 to t97). When the ending time is over (t97), the winning state is over, and a new custom fluctuation display game can be executed.

  If a predetermined number (6 in this case) of game balls wins the normal variation winning device 37 regardless of the opening pattern, the opening of the normal variation winning device 37 is terminated at that time, and the remaining ball processing It will be time.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the ordinary power remaining ball process, first, a process number “5” related to the end process per ordinary figure is set (step B711), and the process number is saved in the ordinary game process number area (step B711). Step B712).

  Next, the usual figure ending time (here, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the usual figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, a signal indicating that the ordinary electric accessory 1 is in operation) OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the common power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the normal control pointer area is cleared (step B716), the normal call end pointer area is cleared (step B717), and the normal electric power remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal figure end process, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B811). B812).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. To save the flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and finish the process for ending the normal figure.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 75, the first game state display unit 76, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 77, the third gaming state display unit 78, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether it is the output on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In this embodiment, when bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on, and a blinking cycle of 128 milliseconds is created.

  If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined. (Step S503) If it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the general-purpose hold number display table 2 is set (Step S504). Then, display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is obtained from the set number of reserved general map display table, and is saved in the segment area for the reserved general map display provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In this embodiment, as long as the number of reserved drawings is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the reserved drawings display table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the number of the special figure 1 hold on which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Among the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step S508). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 1 hold indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). If it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511). When the output on timing is not reached (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step S510). S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 hold indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S513).
Further, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display section is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and a segment for the round display section provided in the RAM 111C. Save in the area (step S515).

  Next, a gaming state display table 1 is set in which a display mode is defined in the first gaming state display unit 76 that is turned on when a time-short state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time-short state (step S516). The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area for the first game state display unit 76 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 76 made up of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support).

  After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 77 for notifying that the right-handed game state is more advantageous than the left-handed game is defined (step S518). Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 77 made up of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left-handed) and right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during big hits and during normal power support). It is configured to light up.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag that is turned on when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on (step S520), and the high probability notification flag is turned on. If so (step S520; Y), the off-data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 78) is saved in the segment area (step S521), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is off (step S520; N), the segment LED editing process is terminated without saving the off data of the high probability notification LED in the segment area.

[Abnormal emission monitoring processing]
Next, details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of game balls existing for each of the upper flow path 38j and the lower flow path 38k is managed, and an abnormal discharge error is detected when discharge is detected even though the existing game balls are zero. Processing related to processing and cancellation of abnormal discharge errors.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). If an abnormal discharge error is occurring, an abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area. judge.
If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step S552). If there is no input (step S552; N), the process proceeds to step S554. To do. In addition, when there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch (step S552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554. .

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S554). If there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. When there is an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S555), and the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated. It is determined whether it is 0 (step S556).

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565, and processing is performed when an abnormality occurs. In the process when an abnormality occurs, an abnormal discharge error flag is prepared (step S565), an abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step S566), and the process proceeds to step S572. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, an input is made to the probability change operation region switch 38d that detects a game ball flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. Since there is a case, processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S557), and it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; N), the process proceeds to step S562. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by +1 (step S559), and it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects a game ball flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. If this is the case, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S561), and it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562). When there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; N), the process proceeds to step S570. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 2 that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is 0, an input is input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects game balls discharged from the lower flow path 38k. Since there is a case, processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

  When the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by -1 (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S570. In this case, no abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancel flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancel command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

  On the other hand, if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the initialization switch 112 (step S567). If there is no input (step S567; N), abnormal discharge is detected. The monitoring process ends. In this case, the state where the abnormal discharge error is occurring continues. If there is an input to the initialization switch (step S567; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S568) and the abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 (step S567) as a process of canceling the abnormal discharge error. S569). Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancel flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancel command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572; Y), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area does not match the prepared flag (step S572; N), the prepared flag is saved in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S573), and an effect command setting process is performed (step S573). S574). Thereby, either the abnormal discharge occurrence command or the abnormal discharge cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal discharge error is occurring when the abnormal discharge occurrence command is received. Since the abnormal discharge error is an error for stopping the game, the progress of the performance is also stopped, and the error notification is continuously performed while the abnormal discharge error occurs. In addition, when the abnormal discharge cancel command is received, the game effect is resumed, and the notification that an abnormal discharge error is occurring is terminated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the new flag is an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574). If the new flag is not an abnormal discharge release flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
If it is an abnormal discharge cancel flag (step S574; Y), that is, if the abnormal discharge error is canceled based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step S576). . If the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step S576; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated.
If the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step S576; Y), a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S577), an effect command setting process is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring process is terminated. Although the game is resumed when the abnormality occurrence error is released, the command is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 in another process when the customer waiting demo state is resumed. By sending a customer waiting demo command, the production of the customer waiting demo state is started.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is started or ended.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether the magnetism is detected (step S601).
When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step S602), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends or is illegal from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, “Step S601; N” → “Step S608” → “Step S609” → “Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is the normal route.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701).
When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of board fraud, the on-board radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, −1 unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If the notification is not made, a command for terminating the board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708). It is determined whether it matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared board radio fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Here, “Step S701; N” → “Step S705” → “Step S706; Y” → “Step S707” → “Step S708” → “Step S709; Y” is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device based on the monitoring result in each processing and set it in an output buffer is performed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step S751). In step S751; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S752), and the process proceeds to step S754. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step S751; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753), and the process proceeds to step S754.

If the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S754; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S755; N), the door / frame opening signal off-data is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step S756), save the off-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (step S757), and proceed to the process of step S760.
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S758), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S759), and the process proceeds to step S760.

  If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 ( Step S760). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S761; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), and step S763 is performed. Move on to processing.
If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S762 is not performed and the process of step S763 is performed. Transition.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, remaining ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passing error, upper college winning mouth fraud, lower major winning mouth fraud, general electric bill fraud and vibration If at least one fraud is occurring (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the ON signal of the security signal is stored. Is saved in the external information output data area (step S776), and the process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, remaining ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper university prize mouth fraud, lower university prize mouth fraud, general power fraud and vibration fraud If not (N in all of steps S763 to S772), the process proceeds to step S774. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; N) and there is no probability variation operating region abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. Further, when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; Y) or there is the probability variation operating region abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data region (step S776). ), The process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

Then, a main winning ball signal editing process (step S777) for setting information regarding the number of winning balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process (step S778) for editing a winning signal at the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special-figure display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S779). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S780).

When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S780; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S781, the external information editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S780; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S781), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) Processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area has a main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is selected from the time of the main prize ball signal being on (for example, high level) (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). The on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main winning ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is sent), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the number of output times set.
For the main award ball signal output for each schedule, the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payments. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc. Even if the payout is made after the big hit, the Hallcon (Hall Computer) is accurately determined by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S778) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, unless the start port signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843).

If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the time of the ON state (for example, high level) of the start port signal (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the OFF state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). It is an on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). In step S848, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). Here, the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

《Renso Notification Production》
Next, the extended resort notification effect in the present embodiment will be described.
This extended resort notification effect is performed, for example, by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the notification start memory to be notified to the extended holiday notification mode in the decorative special figure start storage display unit 42. Production.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the decorative special figure start memory display unit 42 of the present embodiment is provided on the lower left side and the lower right side of the display device 41. The four LEDs are arranged side by side, and the decoration special figure start memory display unit 42 on the right side is also constituted by four LEDs. Then, these eight LEDs are arranged in order from the left: digestion order first start memory → digestion order second start memory → digestion order third start memory → digestion order fourth start memory → digestion order fifth start This corresponds to memory → digestion sequence 6th start memory → digestion sequence 7th start memory → digestion sequence 8th start memory. That is, the leftmost LED in the left special decorative drawing start memory display unit 42 is a special decorative drawing start storage display corresponding to the first start memory in the digestion sequence. The rightmost LED is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the eighth digestion order.

88 (a) and 88 (b) show an example of a recreational notification effect.
In the present embodiment, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the processing of steps A158 and A159 of the special figure hold information determination processing (FIG. 33), and the effect control is performed by the processing of steps A168 and A169. The determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the device 300.
Further, in the present embodiment, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to the high probability state after the special game state is ended based on the fact that the V winning is detected (the probability variation operation region switch 38d detects the game ball). It is supposed to be.

  Therefore, for a start-up memory in which the determination result in the low-probability state is “out of” and the determination result in the high-probability state is “big hit” (hereinafter referred to as “high-probability hold”), When the probability state at the time of execution of the figure variation display game is a low probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory is lost. Therefore, before it is determined whether the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the hold per high probability (hereinafter referred to as “hold per high probability”). If the display mode of “display” is changed to the extended-zone notification mode, there is a possibility that a so-called gasse effect will be performed, and the extended-zone notification effect may be an unreliable effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the V winning is successful (that is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be a high probability state), The display mode of the on-probability hold display is changed from the normal display mode (here, polka dot pattern) to the consecutive villa notification mode (here, lattice pattern). Thereby, a highly reliable continuous resort notification effect can be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (a), after successfully winning a V prize, the high-probability per-hold display display mode is changed to the long-season notification mode, thereby informing the long-village notification effect. Is running.
Here, the case where the V prize is successful means that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a high probability state because there is an input to the probability variation operation region switch 38d when the probability variation operation region 38h is valid. It is. In addition, the case where the V winning is failed is a case where the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a low probability state because there is no input to the probability variation operation region switch 38d when the probability variation operation region 38h is active. is there.

  On the other hand, with respect to the start memory in which the determination result in the low probability state is “big hit” and the determination result in the high probability state is “big hit” (hereinafter referred to as “holding per low probability”), a special feature based on the start memory is used. Regardless of whether the probability state at the time of execution of the figure variation display game is a high probability state or a low probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is a big hit. Therefore, before it is determined whether the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state, the decorative special figure start memory display (hereinafter referred to as “holding per low probability”) Even if the display mode of “display” is changed to the extended resort notification mode, the gaze effect is not performed. Therefore, although the timing (display mode change timing) for changing the display mode of the low-probability hold display to the extended game notification mode is arbitrary, in this embodiment, in accordance with the display mode change timing of the high-probability hold display, When the V winning is successful (that is, when it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state), the display mode of the low-probability hold display is changed to the extended game notification mode. .

An example of the display mode change timing of the high probability hold display is shown in FIG.
In “(1) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b), immediately after successful V winning (t101), the display mode of the high probability hold display is changed to the consecutive resort notification mode. In this case, since the consecutive-village notification effect can be performed substantially simultaneously with the V-winning notification effect for informing that the V-winning has been successful, it is possible to perform effects related to each other as the consecutive-game notification effect and the V-winning notification effect. It becomes. Specifically, when there is a hit hold (high-probability hold, low-probability hold) in an undigested start-up memory (that is, when performing a continuous play notification effect), the V prize notification effect is displayed. When the production mode is set to the first production mode and there is no hit-holding for the notification target in the unstarted start memory (that is, when the extended resort notification production is not performed), the production mode of the V prize notification production is set. When the second effect mode is set and the effect mode of the V winning notification effect is the first effect mode, the display mode of the high-probability hold display (or low-probability hold display) of the notification target is changed from the normal display mode to the continuous play notification. It is possible to perform effects related to each other, such as changing to an aspect.

Also, in “(2) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b), the V winning is successful (t101), and then a predetermined round (FIG. 88 (b) In the example shown in (2), when the second round) is started (t102), the display mode of the high-probability hold display is changed to the consecutive-house notification mode. In this case, since the Renso notification effect is not complicated with the V prize notification effect, reliable notification can be performed.
Also, in “(3) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the V winning is successful (t101) and then the ending effect starts (t103), the display mode of the high probability hold display is continuous. It has changed to the villa notification mode. In this case, since the Renso notification effect is not complicated with the V prize notification effect, reliable notification can be performed.

Next, the timing (display mode return timing) for returning the display mode of the high probability hold display to the normal display mode will be described.
In the example shown in FIG. 89 (a), after a successful V prize is received, the two-pronged per-hold display display mode is changed to the consecutive resort notification mode to thereby notify the “three consecutive resorts” notification. Is running. In such a case, that is, after a successful V prize is received, a two- or more high-probability hold display display mode is changed to a consecutive-house notification mode, thereby executing a consecutive-villa notification effect that notifies “three or more resorts”. In such a case, if the display mode of the high-probability hold display is in the extended game notification mode even after failing to win the V prize in the special game state that has occurred thereafter, there is a possibility that a gasse effect will be performed. There is a risk that the Renso notification effect will be an unreliable effect.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, until the V prize is failed (while the V prize continues to be successful), the display mode of the high-probability hold display continues to be the consecutive resort notification mode, while the V prize is awarded. In the case of failure, for example, as shown in FIG. 89A, the display mode of the high probability hold display is returned to the normal display mode. Thereby, a highly reliable continuous resort notification effect can be performed.

An example of the display mode return timing of the high-probability hold display is shown in FIG.
In “(1) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 89 (b), the V winning is unsuccessful, and then a predetermined round (lever solenoid operation round) after a specific round (in the example shown in FIG. 89 (b)). When the second round) starts (t111), the display mode of the high-probability hold display returns to the normal display mode.
Further, in “(2) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the V winning is failed and then the ending effect is started (t112), the high probability hold display mode is changed to the normal display mode. I'm back.

  The control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described, including the processing for enabling the effects as described above. The main control microcomputer 311 performs a main process shown in FIG. 90 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing.
In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8).
Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed to accept setting of changeable ranges such as brightness and volume of LEDs and the like, and change operations of brightness and volume of LEDs and the like by the player (step C10).
Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching).
If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed. Then, an initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 91 shows the received command check process (step C12) in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202).
If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Determination is made (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210).
If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 92 shows the received command analysis process (step C208) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233).
If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command or the like for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command (step S239). C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the pre-read symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what variation pattern is to be obtained) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal mode, or the display device 41 For example, an effect display is performed. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 93 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the received command analysis process described above. In the jackpot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C411). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern).
If MODE is a fanfare (step C411; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect corresponding to the fanfare command is performed (step C414), and the P machine state is set to a fanfare (step C415). ), The jackpot command processing ends.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C411; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C416). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state.
If MODE is a round (step C416; Y), a roundabout notification effect canceling process for setting the end of the consecutive resort notification effect is performed (step C412), and the round effect setting for updating the number of rounds display information is performed. Processing is performed (step C417), the P machine state is set to round (step C418), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not round (step C416; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an interval (step C419). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds.
If MODE is an interval (step C419; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting an effect during the interval is performed (step C420), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C421), and a big hit System command processing ends.

If the MODE is not an interval (step C419; N), it is determined whether the MODE is an ending (step C422). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the final round.
And when MODE is ending (step C422; Y), for example, when it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, screen information for informing that the high probability state is set is set. An ending effect setting process is performed for setting screen information corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit (step C423), the P machine state is set to ending (step C424), and the V winning flag is set. Then, the V winning flag is cleared (step C413), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE is not an ending (Step C422; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a V prize (Step C425). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a probability change operation region passing command (see step A223).
If MODE is a V prize (step C425; Y), a V prize flag is set (step C426), a V prize notification effect setting process for setting a V prize notification effect is performed (step C427). The extended resort notification effect setting process for setting the holiday notification effect is performed (step C428), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.
If MODE is not a V prize (step C425; N), the jackpot command processing is terminated.

[Renso notification production setting process]
FIG. 94 (a) shows the extended resort notification effect setting process (step C428) in the above jackpot command processing. In this consecutive resort notification effect setting process, first, undigested hit hold (hold per high probability, hold per low probability), and the display mode of the corresponding special figure start memory display is set to the normal display mode. A notification lottery process for determining whether or not to make a notification target (a target of a continuous villa notification effect) is performed for each hit-holding (step C441). Note that the notification object lottery process is not performed in the consecutive resort notification production setting process, but before the consecutive resort notification production setting process (for example, at the start of a lever solenoid operation round or at the start of a special game state). You may go.
And when there is no holding | maintenance which won the notification object lottery process (step C442; N), ie, when there is no start memory of notification object, a renja notification production setting process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if there is a hold for the notification object lottery process (step C442; Y), that is, if there is a start memory to be notified, a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (notification target hold display). Is set to the extended resort notification mode (step C443), and the extended holiday notification effect setting process is terminated. As a result, as shown in “(1) Hold per high probability” shown in FIG. 88 (b), the display mode of the high probability hold display of the notification target changes to the extended resort notification mode immediately after the V winning is successful. . Further, the display mode of the low-probability hold display to be notified changes to the consecutive resort notification mode.

  For example, it is determined whether the V winning flag is set immediately before or after the round effect setting process (step C417) for a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round, and the V winning flag is set. If it is determined, the consecutive home alert effect setting process (step C428) is performed, and the V winning is successful as shown in “(2) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b). When the round starts, the display mode of the high-probability hold display for the notification target (and the low-probability hold display for the notification target) can be changed to the extended resort notification mode.

  Also, for example, it is determined whether the V winning flag is set immediately before or immediately after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V winning flag (step C413)), and the V winning flag is set. When it is determined that is set, the consecutive home alert effect setting process (step C428) is performed, and the V prize is successfully achieved as shown in “(3) high probability hold” shown in FIG. 88 (b). Then, when the ending effect starts, the display mode of the notification target high-probability hold display (and the notification target low-probability hold display) can be changed to the extended resort notification mode.

  Further, for example, immediately before or immediately after the interval effect setting process (step C420) for setting the interval effect to be executed after the lever solenoid operation round, or the round effect setting process for a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round (step It is determined whether the V winning flag is set immediately before or immediately after C417), immediately before or immediately after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V winning flag (step C413)). However, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not set, it is also possible to perform a process of setting the display mode of the low-probability hold display to be notified to the extended resort notification mode. By comprising in this way, even when V winning is unsuccessful, the display mode of the low-probability hold display can be changed to the extended resort notification mode.

[Renso notification effect cancellation processing]
FIG. 94 (b) shows the extended resort notification effect cancellation process (step C412) in the above-mentioned jackpot command processing. In this consecutive resort notification effect canceling process, first, based on the round command from the game control device 100 (see step A854), it is determined whether the current round is a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round ( Step C451).
If it is determined in step C451 that the current round is not the predetermined round (step C451; N), the extended resort notification effect canceling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C451 that the current round is a predetermined round (step C451; Y), it is determined whether the V winning flag is set (step C452). As shown in FIG. 93, in this embodiment, the V winning flag is set before the start of the ending effect, and is cleared at the start of the ending effect. Therefore, if the V winning flag is set, it is understood that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state that is currently generated becomes a high probability state. If the V winning flag is not set, it is currently generated. It can be seen that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a low probability state.
If it is determined in step C452 that the V winning flag is set (step C452; Y), that is, if the probability state after the end of the special gaming state that is currently occurring becomes a high probability state, a high probability Since it is not necessary to return the display mode of the hit hold display to the normal display mode, the consecutive resort notification effect canceling process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C452 that the V winning flag is not set (step C452; N), that is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state that is currently occurring becomes a low probability state, It is determined whether or not there is a high-probability hold display in which the display mode is set to the consecutive resort notification mode (step C453).
In Step C453, when it is determined that there is no hold display per high probability that the display mode is set to the consecutive resort notification mode (Step C453; N), the consecutive resort notification effect canceling process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C453 that there is a high-probability hold display in which the display mode is set to the consecutive house notification mode (step C453; Y), the display mode of the high-probability hold display is normally displayed. The mode is set (step C454), and the extended resort notification effect canceling process is terminated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the V winning is unsuccessful and a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round is started, The display mode of the hold display returns to the normal display mode. On the other hand, if there is a low-probability hold display with the display mode set to the consecutive probability notification mode, the display mode of the low-probability pending display remains in the consecutive holiday notification mode even if the V prize is failed. The normal display mode is not restored.
That is, in the extended resort notification effect cancellation process (the extended holiday notification effect cancellation process shown in FIG. 94 (b)) of the present embodiment, the extended holiday notification effect in which the display mode of the high-probability hold display is changed to the extended holiday notification mode is canceled. However, the extended resort notification effect that sets the display mode of the low-probability hold display to the extended resort notification mode is not canceled.

In addition, when V winning is unsuccessful, the display mode of the low-probability hold display may be configured to cancel the extended villa notification effect in the extended villa notification mode.
Also, for example, it is determined whether the V winning flag is set immediately before or immediately after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V winning flag (step C413)), and the V winning flag is set. When it is determined that there is no set, it is determined whether or not there is a high-probability hold display whose display mode is set to the consecutive house notification mode, and the high-probability hold for which the display mode is set to the consecutive house notification mode When it is determined that there is a display, the processing (step C454) for setting the display mode of the high-probability hold display to the normal display mode is performed (step (C454)). As described above, when the V winning is unsuccessful and then the ending effect starts, the display mode of the high-probability hold display can be returned to the normal display mode.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b), it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests that the consecutive house notification effect is executed if the V prize is successful. In the example shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and (b), when the lever solenoid operation round starts (t121), the display mode of the high-probability hold display to be notified is changed from the normal display mode (here, the polka dot pattern) to the suggested mode ( In this case, the display mode is changed to an oblique striped pattern), and immediately after successful V winning (t122), the display mode is changed from the suggestion mode to the extended-zone notification mode (here, grid pattern).
The timing at which the display mode is changed to the suggestion mode is not limited to the start time of the lever solenoid operation round, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it is before the start of the lever solenoid operation round.

When performing the suggestion effect, for example, the effect control device 300, for example, first of all, the undigested start-up memory (holding per high probability, holding per low probability, off hold (the determination result in the low probability state is also high probability) A suggestion target lottery for determining whether or not to make a suggestion target (a target of the suggestion effect) is performed for each of the start memories) whose determination results in the state are also “out of”. In addition, for each undigested hit hold (hold per high probability, hold per low probability), a notification target lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to make a notification target (a target for a villa notification effect).
And the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the suggestion target is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode at a predetermined first timing.

Further, when the start memory in which the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode is the start memory to be notified, and when the V winning is successful, the decoration feature corresponding to the start memory is further added. The display mode of the figure start memory display is changed from the suggestion mode to the extended resort notification mode.
In addition, if the start memory in which the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the suggestion mode is not the notification target start memory, it corresponds to the start memory even after determining whether the V winning is successful or unsuccessful. After the display of the decoration special figure start memory display to be performed is in the suggested state, or after it is determined whether the V winning is successful or unsuccessful, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is displayed. The display mode is returned from the suggestion mode to the normal display mode.

  Then, in a state where the display mode of the high-probability hold display is the consecutive house notification mode, when the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, at the start of a predetermined round (t131 after the lever solenoid operation round). )) Is canceled, the extended resort notification effect that changes the display mode of the high-probability hold display to the extended resort notification mode is canceled. At that time, for example, the display mode may be returned to the suggestion mode as shown by a solid line in FIG. 95 (c), or the display mode is changed to the normal display mode as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 95 (c). You may return.

The display device 41 may be configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). When configured in this way, if the V prize is successful, for example, as shown in FIG. 96A, an effect of displaying the character image “V” on the display device 41 as the V prize notification effect may be performed. it can. In addition, an effect related to the prize notification effect can be performed as a consecutive resort notification effect.
Specifically, for example, if there is one hit hold (hold per high probability, hold per low probability) in the undigested start-up memory, the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)) ), For example, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the character image “V” is moved toward the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display while being reduced, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (d). In addition, as the extended resort notification effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding decoration special figure start memory display from the normal display mode (here, the polka dot pattern) to the extended holiday notification mode (here, the lattice pattern) may be performed. it can.

Further, for example, when there are two hits to be notified (holding per high probability, holding per low probability) in the unstarted start-up memory, after the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)) For example, as shown in FIG. 96 (e), two character images “V” are displayed, and each character image is reduced and moved toward the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display. As shown in FIG. 96 (g), as the extended resort notification effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding decoration special figure start memory display from the normal display mode to the extended holiday notification mode can be performed. Alternatively, after the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)), as shown in FIG. 96 (f), for example, a divided image obtained by dividing the character image “V” into two is displayed. Is moved toward the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display, and then, as shown in, for example, FIG. It is possible to perform effects such as changing from the normal display mode to the extended resort notification mode.
On the other hand, if there is no hit hold on the notification target in the undigested start memory (if there is no hit hold in the undigested start memory, or there is a hit hold in the undigested start memory, the pertinent hold Is not a notification target), after the V prize notification effect (for example, FIG. 96 (a)), as shown in FIG. It does not change.

  In addition, when the display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), a CRT (CRT), etc. Instead, (or in addition), a recreational zone notification effect using the display device 41 may be performed.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment provides a special game that gives a player a game value when a result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a special result. In a game machine that generates a state, it can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can win, and a specific region in which a game ball can flow into (probability change operation region) 38h) a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38), a probability state where a special result occurs, a normal probability state (low probability state), a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, Whether the probability control means (game control device 100) to be set to any of the above and the right to execute the variable display game can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a special result is obtained for each start memory? A variation display game is executed based on the starting storage means (game control device 100) for extracting and storing a random number for determining whether or not and a random number corresponding to the starting storage stored in the starting storage means. Pre-determining means (game control device 100) for determining before the game, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the execution of effects related to the variable display game. Then, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special gaming state to the normal probability state when the game ball won in the special variation winning device does not flow into the specific area during the occurrence of the special gaming state. In addition, if a game ball that has won a special variation winning device during the occurrence of a special game state flows into a specific area, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to a high probability state, Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, during the occurrence of the special gaming state, it is possible to execute a continuous jackpot notification effect (a continuous game notification effect) for notifying that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory becomes a special result. If there is a start memory (holding per high probability) that is determined to be a special result by the prior determination means, continuous jackpot notification effect for the start memory (in this embodiment, The effect) that the display mode of the probability per hold display in extended game notification manner, is configured to run after the game ball with winning flows into the specific region in a special variation winning device (for example, see FIG. 88).

  Therefore, after determining that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state, a continuous jackpot notification effect (continuous villa notification effect) for the start memory (holding per high probability) determined to be a special result is obtained. Since it performs, a reliable continuous jackpot production can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the prior determination means (game control device 100) corresponds to the normal probability state when determining whether or not the result of the variable display game based on the start memory becomes a special result. The determination based on the determination value to be performed and the determination based on the determination value corresponding to the high probability state are performed, and the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is specially operated in the high probability state by the prior determination means. When there is a start memory determined to be a result (holding per high probability), a continuous jackpot notification effect for the start memory (in the case of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the display mode of the high probability hold display to the extended resort notification mode) ) Can be configured to be executed after the game ball that has won the special variable winning device flows into the specific area.

  By configuring in this manner, after determining that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state, the start memory (holding per high probability) determined to have a special result in the high probability state Since the continuous big hit notification effect (renso resort notification effect) can be executed, a highly reliable continuous big hit effect can be executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is configured such that the game ball won in the special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) is in the specific region (probability varying operation region 38h). When the inflow occurs, an inflow notification effect (V winning notification effect) for notifying the inflow can be executed, and the effect mode of the inflow notification effect is changed from the normal effect mode (for example, see FIG. 96 (a)) to a specific effect mode (for example, 96 (c), (e), and (f)), it is configured to be able to suggest the execution of the continuous big hit notification effect (long villa notification effect).

  By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to improve effectively the expectation with respect to performing a continuous jackpot alerting | reporting effect (renjiso alerting effect).

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is a start memory (high probability) determined by the prior determination means (the game control device 100) to have a special result in a high probability state. A special bonus winning device (first special variation) in a special gaming state after the special gaming state that occurred at the start of execution of the continuous jackpot notification effect. The game ball that has won the winning device 38) can be configured to be canceled when it does not flow into the specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) (see, for example, FIG. 89).

  By configuring in this way, when it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not a high probability state during the execution of the continuous jackpot notification effect (rensou notification effect), Since the execution is terminated, it is possible to execute a highly reliable continuous jackpot effect.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is based on the start-up memory during the occurrence of the special game state based on the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100). A continuous jackpot suggesting effect (suggested effect) suggesting that the result of the variable display game (special variable display game) may be a special result can be executed, and a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device) 38) Starting memory (holding per high probability) determined based on the fact that the game ball won in 38) has flowed into the specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) and has a special result in the high probability state by the prior determination means. Can be configured so that it can be changed to a continuous jackpot notification effect (longsole notification effect) for the start-up memory (see, for example, FIG. 95).

By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to improve effectively the expectation with respect to performing a continuous jackpot alerting | reporting effect (renja-so alerting effect).
The gaming machine 10 includes a distribution device that distributes the game balls won in the special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) to either the specific region (probability variation operation region 38h) or the non-specific region. It may be a thing. In this case, in particular, it is possible to enhance interest by executing a continuous jackpot suggesting effect (suggesting effect).

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player when a result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is a special result. Can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can win, and a specific region (probability change operation region 38h) into which a game ball can flow into. ), A second special variable winning device 39 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won in a special gaming state and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and a special result A probability control means (game control device 100) for setting a probability state in which the probability of occurrence is one of a normal probability state (low probability state) and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and a variable display game Run Starting storage means (game control device 100) for extracting and storing a random number for determining whether or not a special result is obtained for each starting storage, as well as being able to store interest as starting storage; , A prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining a random number corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory, and the variable display game Production control means (production control device 300) for performing production execution control. Then, if the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 38 does not flow into the specific area during the occurrence of the special game state, the probability control means determines the probability state after the end of the special game state as a normal probability. When the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area during the occurrence of the special game state, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the high probability state. Then, the effect control means, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, during the occurrence of the special gaming state, the continuous jackpot notification effect (rensou) that notifies that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory becomes a special result When there is a start memory (holding per high probability) that is determined to be a special result by the prior determination means, a continuous jackpot notification effect (the book) In the case of the embodiment, after the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, the execution of the high-probability on-hold display mode is changed to the consecutive resort notification mode is performed. 2. The special variable winning device 39 is configured to start during a period (round) in which it is converted into a closed state and an open state (see, for example, “(2) Hold per high probability” in FIG. 88).

  Therefore, after determining that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a high probability state, a continuous jackpot notification effect (continuous villa notification effect) for the start memory (holding per high probability) determined to be a special result is obtained. Since it performs, a reliable continuous jackpot production can be performed.

Note that in “(2) high probability hold” in FIG. 88, at the start of a period (round) in which the second special variable prize-winning device 39 converts between a closed state and an open state, a villa notification effect (continuous jackpot notification effect) ) Is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution start timing of the recreational notification effect is the start of a period (round) in which the second special variable winning device 39 converts between the closed state and the open state It may be a predetermined time from the end to the end, or may be the end of a period (round) in which the second special variable winning device 39 is converted into a closed state and an open state.
In addition, in “(2) high probability hold” in FIG. 88, immediately after the lever solenoid operation round in a plurality of periods (a plurality of rounds) in which the second special variable winning device 39 is converted into a closed state and an open state. In this round, the execution of the consecutive resort notification effect (continuous jackpot notification effect) is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period (round) for converting between the closed state and the open state can be appropriately changed as long as the round is after the lever solenoid operation round.
Further, when the final round is a lever solenoid operation round, as shown in “(3) high probability hold” in FIG. 88, during the ending (“(3) high probability hold” in FIG. 88, At the time of the start of the ending effect, the execution of the consecutive villa notification effect (continuous jackpot notification effect) may be started.

<< Fluctuation pattern >>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in order to shorten the period of the high probability state (the period in which the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state) from the viewpoint of improving the time efficiency, As a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed at the same time, a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected.
97A and 97B show an example of a variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state (probability variation state) among the variation group tables in the present embodiment.
FIG. 97A shows a variation group table when the result is out of place. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A454 in the special figure information setting process.

The variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table includes a reachless short system, an N reach short system, a non-reach system, an N reach system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system. Each of the distribution rates is set.
The variation group (variation pattern selection table) is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1 (see steps A462 to A464). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535. In the case of this embodiment, for example, 40,000 values are assigned to a short system without reach. In other words, the reachless short-type variation group is selected with a probability of 40,000 / 65536.

  The variation pattern (variation pattern number) is selected by the selected variation group (variation pattern selection table) and the variation pattern random number 2 (see steps A465 to A467). In the case of the present embodiment, for example, when a short variation group without reach is selected, a variation pattern of short variation without reach having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and when a variation group without reach is selected. The variation pattern of the variation without reach with the variation time of 8 seconds or the variation without reach with the variation time of 12 seconds is selected.

FIG. 97B is a variation group table when the result is a big hit. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special figure information setting process.
There are N reach short system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system as a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table, and a distribution rate is set for each. .

As shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state period, a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is more easily selected as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game. Longer fluctuation patterns are less likely to be selected.
In this way, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed during the period of the high probability state. For example, as illustrated in FIG. It is possible to shorten the probability state period, that is, to increase the number of occurrences of the special gaming state per unit time.

Here, in the present embodiment, the premier reach type variation group cannot be selected by a variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state, but can be selected only by a variation group table (not shown) that can be selected in a low probability state. is there. In other words, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation, which is the variation pattern having the longest variation time, is not selected during the high probability state period.
In the present embodiment, the premier reach type variation group cannot be selected by the variation group table when the result is out of place, but can be selected only by the variation group table when the result is a big hit. Therefore, in the present embodiment (also in the modification described later), it can be said that the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation is a jackpot fixed fluctuation pattern.

Note that the variation pattern of the premier reach variation is not limited to the variation pattern having the longest variation time, but may be any variation pattern having a relatively long variation time.
The fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is, for example, the longest fluctuation time (105 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B) and the longest of the fluctuation times of reach fluctuations other than the premium reach fluctuation. The variation pattern may be a variation pattern with a variation time longer than a short variation time (10 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B), or among the variation times of the SP reach variation, An intermediate time between the longest fluctuation time (105 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b)) and the shortest fluctuation time (30 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and (b)). It may be a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time.

<Modification 1>
When high probability states occur continuously, the number of occurrences of special gaming states per unit time can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
As a method of reducing the number of occurrences of the special gaming state per unit time, for example, a method of extending the period of the high probability state can be mentioned.
As a technique for extending the period of the high probability state, for example, not only the period of the low probability state (normal probability state) but also the special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as “big hit” in which the result is a big hit in the period of the high probability state. As a variation pattern of “variation”), there is a technique that allows selection of a variation pattern of premier reach variation.

<Modification 1-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), this special game state is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state). If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
When the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premium reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, it is possible to select a variation pattern of the premier reach variation as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state.

[Big hits end processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control apparatus 100 according to the present modification executes a jackpot end process shown in FIG. 99 instead of the jackpot end process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 99, in the big hit ending process of this modification, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1001), and the special game state of this time has a high probability & short time. (Step A1002).

If the current special gaming state is not based on a hit with a high probability & short time (step A1002; N), that is, this special gaming state is based on a hit with a low probability & no short time, low If the probability is based on a hit with probability & short time, save the low probability medium flag in the previous hit probability state flag area (step A1031), and whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol Is determined (step A1003).
When the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A1003; N), information on the start of the short time mode B is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
If the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A1003; Y), information on the start of the short time mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

On the other hand, if the current special gaming state is based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A1002; Y), the high probability medium flag is saved in the previous hit probability state flag area (step A1032). ), Information on the start of the short time mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
Since the processing after Step A1006 (Steps A1006 to A1030) is the same as the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 62, description of the processing after Step A1006 will be omitted.

[Special figure information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 100 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 100, in the special figure information setting process of this modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability state is a low-probability state that is not a short-time state (low probability & no short-time state), a high-probability state and short-time state (high-probability & short-time state), a low-probability state and short-time state (low-probability & short-time state). One of the three states. Also, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol (step A453). If it is an off symbol (step A453; Y), it corresponds to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The variable group selection pointer is updated to the value (step A454), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
If it is not an outlier symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not a high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is a low probability state and not a short time state (low probability & no short time), a low probability state and a short time state If it is in any of the states (low probability & short time), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & short time), It is determined whether the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a high probability medium flag (step A457).

When the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is not a high probability flag (step A457; N), that is, when the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a low probability flag Saves the pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455) and ends the special figure information setting process.
On the other hand, if the previous hit probability state flag is a high probability flag (step A457; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the extended game (step A458), and the pointer is set to the variable group selection pointer area. Is saved (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

Here, FIGS. 101A and 101B show an example of the variation group table in the variation group table in this modification example that can be selected in a high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is a big hit. .
Of the variation group tables in this modification, the variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is out of order can be selected in the high probability state among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. This is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97 (a)) when the result is out of place.

  FIG. 101A shows a variation group table when the low probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. The variation group table shown in FIG. 101 (a) is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97 (b)) that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is a big hit among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. It is.

FIG. 101 (b) is a variation group table when the high probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table include the N reach short system, the N reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, the SP3 reach system, and the premier reach system. Is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), in this modified example, during the period of high probability, a variation pattern that is easily selected as a variation pattern of big hit variation is saved when the low probability medium flag is saved. It differs depending on when the high probability flag is saved. Specifically, when the low probability medium flag is saved, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more easily selected as a variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the high probability state, and the variation time is long. The pattern is less likely to be selected. On the other hand, when the high-probability flag is saved, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is less likely to be selected as a variation pattern of the big hit variation that is executed during the high-probability state, and a variation pattern with a longer variation time is selected. It is easy to be done.

Thus, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (period of the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state to occur (the period of the second high probability state) and the period of the second high probability state will be longer than the period of the first high probability state. Since it becomes high, it is possible to reduce the short-time ball-out rate, and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), for example, the variation pattern of N reach short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the first high probability state. It is a timing chart which shows an example at the time of the change pattern of a premium reach fluctuation | variation being selected as a fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation | variation performed during the period of the high probability state of the 1st time.

  In this modified example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation cannot be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation executed during the period of the high probability state. This is not a limitation. That is, even when the low probability medium flag is saved, a variation pattern of the premier reach variation may be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Further, in this configuration, if the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach variation is higher when the high probability flag is saved than when the low probability flag is saved, 1 It is possible to increase the possibility that the second and subsequent high probability state periods will be longer than the second high probability state period.

  Specifically, among the variable group tables that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, not only the variable group table when the high probability flag is saved, but also the low probability medium flag is saved. Even if the fluctuation group table is selected, it is possible to select a premier reach type fluctuation group, and the fluctuation when the high probability medium flag is saved than the fluctuation group table when the low probability medium flag is saved. If the group table is configured so that the allocation ratio of the premier reach variable group is higher, the period of the second high probability state can be longer than the period of the first high probability state. Can increase the sex.

In addition, if the configuration of this modification is applied, it is possible to lengthen the time-short period.
More specifically, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special-time shortage at a predetermined timing, the short-time / non-short-time flag is saved, and the current special game state is special-purpose. If it is based on a win in the short time, save the short in time flag.
When the short / no-short flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the time-short state period. On the other hand, when the shortage / medium flag is saved, it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation as a fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation executed during the time reduction state.

  As a result, the time-short state period (the first time-short state period) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state based on hits other than the special figure short-time and the end of the special gaming state based on the special figure short-time hits There is a higher possibility that the time-short state period that occurs later (second time-short state period) and the second time-short state period will be longer than the first time-short-state period. In addition, it is possible to reduce the short-term launch rate and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

<Modification 1-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special game state this time is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state). The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium number is updated by +1 if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability.
When the high probability medium count is 0, the variation pattern of the premium reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the number of high probability is one or more times, the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation executed during the period of the high probability state. It is also possible to configure such that the selectivity of the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation increases.

[Big hits end processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control apparatus 100 according to the present modification executes the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 102 instead of the jackpot end process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 102, in the big hit ending process of this modification, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1001), and the current special game state has a high probability & short time. (Step A1002).

If the current special gaming state is not based on a hit with a high probability & short time (step A1002; N), that is, this special gaming state is based on a hit with a low probability & no short time, low If it is one based on a hit with probability & short time, the high probability medium number area for managing the high probability medium number is cleared to 0 (step A1033), and the jackpot symbol is the V easy symbol Is determined (step A1003).
When the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A1003; N), information on the start of the short time mode B is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
If the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A1003; Y), information on the start of the short time mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

On the other hand, when the special gaming state this time is based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A1002; Y), the value of the high probability medium number area (high probability medium number) is updated by +1 ( Step A1034), information on the start of the short time mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (Step A1005), and the process proceeds to Step A1006.
Since the processing after Step A1006 (Steps A1006 to A1030) is the same as the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 62, description of the processing after Step A1006 will be omitted.

[Special figure information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 103 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 103, in the special figure information setting process of this modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability state is a low-probability state that is not a short-time state (low probability & no short-time state), a high-probability state and short-time state (high-probability & short-time state), a low-probability state and short-time state (low-probability & short-time state). One of the three states. Also, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol (step A453). If it is an off symbol (step A453; Y), it corresponds to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number. The variable group selection pointer is updated to the value (step A454), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
If it is not an outlier symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not a high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is a low probability state and not a short time state (low probability & no short time), a low probability state and a short time state If it is in any of the states (low probability & short time), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & short time), The variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the value in the high probability medium frequency area (high probability medium frequency) (step A459), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and special figure information setting is performed. The process ends.

Here, FIGS. 104A to 104D show an example of the variation group table in the variation group table in this modification example that can be selected in a high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is a big hit. .
Of the variation group tables in this modification, the variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is out of order can be selected in the high probability state among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. This is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97 (a)) when the result is out of place.

104 (a), (b), (c), and (d), respectively, when the high probability medium count is 0, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times or more. It is a variation group table in the case. These variation group tables are variation group tables that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A459 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
As the variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by these variation group tables, there are N reach short system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system, and premier reach system. Is set. The variation group table shown in FIG. 104 (a) is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97 (b)) that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is a big hit among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 (a) to 104 (d), in this variation, during the high probability state, the variation pattern that is easily selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation differs depending on the number of times with high probability. Specifically, when the high probability medium count is 0, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more easily selected as a variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the high probability state, and the variation time is long. The pattern is less likely to be selected. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is one or more times, as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state, a variation pattern with a short variation time is less likely to be selected, and In addition to being easily selected, a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected as the number of high-probability mediums increases.

  Thus, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (period of the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state to occur (the period of the second high probability state) and the period of the second high probability state will be longer than the period of the first high probability state. Since it becomes high, it is possible to reduce the short-time ball-out rate, and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, the possibility that the period of the high probability state becomes longer as the number of times that the high probability state continuously occurs increases (in the case of this modification, the second time than the period of the first high probability state). The high probability state period is likely to be longer, and the third high probability state period is more likely to be longer than the second high probability state period). It is possible to effectively prevent the property from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), for example, the variation pattern of N reach short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the first high probability state, and the second high The variation pattern of SP reach variation (SP1, SP2, or SP3 reach variation) is selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the probability state period, and the jackpot variation executed during the third high probability state period is selected. It is a timing chart which shows an example when the variation pattern of a premier reach variation is selected as a variation pattern.

  In this modification, when the high probability medium count is 0, the variation pattern of the premium reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. This is not a limitation. That is, even when the high probability medium number is 0, it may be configured such that the variation pattern of the premium reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state. In addition, when configured in this way, if the selection rate of the variation pattern of the premier reach variation is higher when the high probability medium count is 1 or more than when the high probability medium count is 0, It is possible to increase the possibility that the period of the second and subsequent high probability states will be longer than the period of the first high probability state.

  Specifically, among the variable group tables that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is a big hit, the variable group table when the high probability medium number is not 0 (in the case of this modification, the high probability medium number) Variable group table when the number of times of high probability is 2, and variable group table when the number of times of high probability is 2 or more) Even when the number of times is 0, even when the number of times is 0, the premier reach-type variable group can be selected, and the number of times with high probability is not 0 compared with the time when the number of times with high probability is 0. If the variable group table is configured so that the distribution ratio of the premier reach-type variable group is higher, the second and subsequent high-rate groups will be higher than the first high-probability period. It can increase the likelihood that people period rate state is long term.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, the same variation group table is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. That is, even when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, different variation group tables may be selected according to the high probability medium count. In addition, even when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, a different variation group table is selected according to the high probability medium count, and the variation pattern has a long variation time as the high probability medium count increases. It is also possible to configure so that is easily selected.
In addition, in this modification, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time as the number of high-probability mediums increases. However, this is not limited to this. The pattern selection rate only needs to increase. That is, as the number of high-probability mediums increases, the distribution ratio of the premier reach type variation group only needs to be increased.

In addition, if the configuration of this modification is applied, it is possible to lengthen the time-short period.
Specifically, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special figure short time at a predetermined timing, the number of short hours and medium times is cleared to 0 and the special game state this time is special. If it is based on winning in the figure, the number of times with the time is updated by +1.
When the number of times with a short time is 0, it is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation cannot be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation executed during the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the number of times with a short time is 1 or more, a premier reach fluctuation pattern can be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation to be executed during the short time period, and as the number of times with a short time increases, the premium It is also possible to configure such that the selectivity of the variation pattern of reach variation increases.

  As a result, the time-short state period (the first time-short state period) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state based on hits other than the special figure short-time and the end of the special gaming state based on the special figure short-time hits There is a higher possibility that the time-short state period that occurs later (second time-short state period) and the second time-short state period will be longer than the first time-short-state period. In addition, it is possible to reduce the short-term launch rate and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

As described above, the effect control device 300 displays the decoration special figure variation display according to the variation pattern (variation pattern selected by the game control device 100) determined based on the reception of the information related to the start of the special figure variation display game. Set detailed contents for the game.
In the modified example 1-1 and the modified example 1-2, the production control device 300 counts the number of times with high probability (or the number of consecutive resorts), and as the number of times with high probability (or the number of consecutive resorts) increases, You may make it increase the production content which can be set as production content (production content (production aspect) of premier reach production) according to the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation. Thereby, for example, an effect based on a series of stories over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games (that is, an effect such that the story progresses as the number of high probability times (or the number of consecutive resorts) increases), etc. This makes it possible to increase interest. Here, the number of consecutive games is the number of continuous occurrences of a special gaming state that generates a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that the number of consecutive games may be the number of occurrences of the special game state within the time-short state (electric support state).

  Also, in the modified example 1-1 and modified example 1-2, the premier reach variation group cannot be selected by the variation group table when the result is out of place, but only by the variation group table when the result is a big hit. Although it is configured so that it can be selected (the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation is the jackpot fixed fluctuation pattern), it is not limited to this. In other words, the premier reach type variable group may be selected not only by the variable group table when the result is a big hit, but also by the variable group table when the result is out of order.

  Further, in the modified example 1-1, the second high probability state period may be configured to be more likely to be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, a variation pattern of the premium reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, it may be configured such that the variation pattern of the premium reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

  Further, in the modified example 1-2, the possibility that the period of the high probability state becomes a short period may increase as the number of times the high probability state continuously occurs increases. Specifically, for example, it is possible to select a variation pattern of the premier reach variation as a variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state regardless of the medium number of high probability. It may be configured such that the selectivity of the variation pattern of the premier reach variation decreases as the number increases. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

Further, in the modified example 1-1, regardless of whether the saved last hit time probability state flag is a low probability medium flag or a high probability medium flag, As a variation pattern, a variation pattern of the premier reach variation can be selected, and when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the premier reach variation. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, it is possible to select a variation pattern of the second variation time longer than the first variation time as the variation pattern of the premier reach variation.
Furthermore, when configured in this way, the effect control device 300 performs the change display effect before the reach effect when the change pattern of the first change time is selected and when the change pattern of the second change time is selected. The period of (including the reach effect) is the same, and the period of the temporary stop display effect for temporarily stopping and displaying all of the left, middle, and right symbols is different (the variation pattern of the second variation time is more of the temporary stop display effect) You may perform a premier reach production with a long period. Thereby, it can suppress that a player consumes a game ball wastefully. In addition, regarding the variation display effect before the reach effect, the same effect can be performed when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected.

Further, in the modified example 1-2, the variation pattern of the premium reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state regardless of the number of times of the high probability. When the number of times is 0, the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the premium reach fluctuation, while when the number of times with a high probability is one or more, the fluctuation of the premium reach fluctuation. As a pattern, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than the first variation time is selected, and the variation time of the premier reach variation can be increased as the number of high probability mediums increases.
Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, the effect control device 300 performs reach effect when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the first variation time is selected. The period of the previous variable display effect (including the reach effect) is the same, and different premier reach effects may be executed during the temporary stop display effect period in which all of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed temporarily. Thereby, it can suppress that a player consumes a game ball wastefully. In addition, for the variation display effect before the reach effect, the same effect is performed when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the first variation time is selected. be able to.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example 1-1 and the modified example 1-2 allows the player to play a game when the result of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to the game machine, after the special gaming state ends, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the case of this modification, the probability variation operation area switch 38d has detected a gaming ball). , A specific state (high probability state in the case of this variation) is generated, which is likely to have a special game state occurrence timing earlier than the normal state (low probability state (normal probability state in the case of this variation)) Specific state generating means (game control device 100) and a variation pattern for executing a variation display game are represented by a variation pattern table (in the case of this modification, a variation group table and a variation pattern selection table). A change pattern setting means for setting, based on (a game controller 100), and a. The variable display game is executed in a specific state (first high probability state) generated after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed in the normal state, and the result is a variable display in which the result is a special result. A variation display game that is executed during a specific state (second and subsequent high probability states) that occurs after the end of a special game state based on a variation display game that is executed during a specific state, where the game is a normal variation display game. When the variation display game having a special result is a specific variation display game, the variation pattern setting means sets a variation pattern of the specific variation display game as a variation pattern table (for example, FIG. )) And a variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 101 (b)) that can be easily selected. That.

  Therefore, the period of the specific state (period of the first specific state) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the normal state, and the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the specific state There is a high possibility that the period of the specific state that occurs after the end of the period (the period of the specific state after the second time), and the period of the specific state after the second will be longer than the period of the first specific state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example 1-2, the identification that is executed while the specific occurrence state is the number of times that the specific occurrence is continuously generated is performed during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state). The variable display game is the first specific variable display game, and the specific variable display game that is executed during the second specific state (for example, the third high probability state) in which the number of consecutive occurrences is greater than the first number is the second. In the case of the specific variation display game, the variation pattern setting means (game control device 100) sets the variation pattern of the second specific variation display game as a variation pattern table (for example, FIG. It is possible to set based on a variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 104 (c)) in which a variation time longer than b)) is easily selected.

  Therefore, since the possibility that the period of the specific state becomes longer as the number of times that the specific state continuously occurs increases, it is possible to effectively prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1-1 and modified example 1-2, the specific state is that the probability that the result of the variation display game (special figure variation display game) will be a special result is a normal state (low probability state). It is a high probability variation state (high probability state) compared to.

Therefore, it is more likely that the period of the second or later probability change state (high probability state) is longer than the period of the first probability change state (high probability state). Can be prevented.
The specific state may be an electric support state (short time state) in which a game ball is likely to win a normal electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37). In other words, the specific state may be a state that is a probability variation state but is not an electric support state, or may be a state that is not a probability variation state but is an electric support state, or is a probability variation state and an electric support state. It may be in a state.

<Modification 2>
In addition, as a method of lengthening the period of the high probability state, for example, any of the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as “outlier variation”) in which the result is out of order in the period of the high probability state. (In the case of this modification, there is a method of extending the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation fluctuation pattern without reach).

<Modification 2-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), this special game state is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state). If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
When the low probability medium flag is saved, the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in the case of this modification) is used as the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach short fluctuation executed during the high probability state. Configure the pattern to be selected. On the other hand, if the high probability flag is saved, the second variation time longer than the first variation time (in the case of this modification) A variation pattern of (2.1 seconds) can be selected.

[Big hits end processing]
The jackpot end process of the present modification is the same as the jackpot end process (see FIG. 99) of Modification 1-1.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 99 instead of the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (a), the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 105 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 105, in the special figure information setting process of the present modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability state is a low-probability state that is not a short-time state (low probability & no short-time state), a high-probability state and short-time state (high-probability & short-time state), a low-probability state and short-time state (low-probability & short-time state). One of the three states. Also, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a missing symbol (step A453). If it is not a missing symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, a pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( Step A455), the special figure information setting process is terminated.
If the symbol is a missing symbol (step A453; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not a high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is a low probability state and not a short time state (low probability & no short time), a low probability state and a short time state If the state is low (with low probability & short time), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number (step A454), and the variable group The pointer is saved in the selected pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & short time), It is determined whether the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a high probability medium flag (step A457).

When the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is not a high probability flag (step A457; N), that is, when the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a low probability flag The variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number (step A454), and the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455). The figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the previous hit probability state flag is a high probability flag (step A457; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the extended game (step A458), and the pointer is set to the variable group selection pointer area. Is saved (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.

Here, FIGS. 106A and 106B show an example of the variation group table in the variation group table in this modification example that can be selected in the high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is out of order. .
Of the variation group tables in this modification, the variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is a big hit can be selected in the high probability state among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. This is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97B) when the result is a big hit.

FIG. 106A shows a variation group table when the low probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A454 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
As the variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table, the first reachless short system, the N reach short system, the non reach system, the N reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system. There are systems, each with a distribution rate. For example, when the first non-reach short variation group is selected, the variation pattern of the short variation without reach for the first variation time (2.0 seconds in this modification) is selected. .

FIG. 106B is a variation group table when the high probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
As the variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table, the second reachless short system, the N reach short system, the non reach system, the N reach system, the SP1 reach system, the SP2 reach system, and the SP3 reach system. There are systems, each with a distribution rate. For example, when the second reachless short fluctuation group is selected, the short fluctuation without reach of the second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in this modification) longer than the first fluctuation time is selected. The variation pattern is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), in this modified example, during the period of high probability, the variation time of the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern of the short reach without variation is saved in the low probability medium flag. It is different when the flag is saved and when the high probability flag is saved. Specifically, when the low probability medium flag is saved, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (in the case of this modification, the fluctuation pattern) is used as the fluctuation pattern of the short reachless change executed during the high probability state period. The fluctuation pattern of time 2.0 seconds) is selected. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, a variation pattern with a long variation time (in the case of this modification, variation time 2. 1 second fluctuation pattern) is selected.

Thus, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (period of the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state to occur (the period of the second high probability state) and the period of the second high probability state will be longer than the period of the first high probability state. Since it becomes high, it is possible to reduce the short-time ball-out rate, and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98A, for example, the variation pattern of the first reachless short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the outlier variation executed during the first high probability state period. It is a timing chart which shows an example when the variation pattern of the 2nd short reach variation is selected as a variation pattern of the deviation variation performed during the period of the 3rd time and the 3rd high probability state.

Note that if the configuration of the present modification is applied, the time-short state period can be extended.
More specifically, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special-time shortage at a predetermined timing, the short-time / non-short-time flag is saved, and the current special game state is special-purpose. If it is based on a win in the short time, save the short in time flag.
Then, when the no-short-time flag is saved, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the non-reach short variation executed during the time-short state period. On the other hand, when the short / long flag is saved, the fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation without reach executed during the time reduction period. It is also possible to configure.

  As a result, the time-short state period (the first time-short state period) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state based on hits other than the special figure short-time and the end of the special gaming state based on the special figure short-time hits There is a higher possibility that the time-short state period that occurs later (second time-short state period) and the second time-short state period will be longer than the first time-short-state period. In addition, it is possible to reduce the short-term launch rate and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

<Modification 2-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special game state this time is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state). The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium number is updated by +1 if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability.
When the high probability medium count is 0, the fluctuation of the first fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in the case of this modification) is used as the fluctuation pattern of the reachless short fluctuation executed during the high probability state period. Configure the pattern to be selected. On the other hand, when the number of times with high probability is 1 or more, as a variation pattern of short variation without reach executed during the period of high probability, a variation time longer than the first variation time (in the case of this modification, 2 (1 sec. Or more) variation pattern is selected, and the variation time of reachless short variation can be increased as the number of high-probability mediums increases.

[Big hits end processing]
The jackpot end process of the present modification is the same as the jackpot end process (see FIG. 102) of Modification 1-2.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 102 instead of the jackpot end process shown in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 107 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 107, in the special figure information setting process of the present modification, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). Note that the probability state is a low-probability state that is not a short-time state (low probability & no short-time state), a high-probability state and short-time state (high-probability & short-time state), a low-probability state and short-time state (low-probability & short-time state). One of the three states. Also, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, the 12R probability variation symbol, the 5R probability variation symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variation symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a missing symbol (step A453). If it is not a missing symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, a pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( Step A455), the special figure information setting process is terminated.
If the symbol is a missing symbol (step A453; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not a high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is a low probability state and not a short time state (low probability & no short time), a low probability state and a short time state If the state is low (with low probability & short time), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number (step A454), and the variable group The pointer is saved in the selected pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is a high probability state and a short time state (high probability & short time), The variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the value in the high probability medium frequency area (high probability medium frequency) (step A459), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and special figure information setting is performed. The process ends.

Here, examples of the variation group table in the variation group table in this modification example that can be selected in the high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is out of order are shown in FIGS. .
Of the variation group tables in this modification, the variation group table that can be selected in a high probability state and the result is a big hit can be selected in the high probability state among the variation group tables in the above embodiment. This is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97B) when the result is a big hit.

108 (a), (b), (c), and (d), respectively, the high probability medium number is 0, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times or more. It is a variation group table in the case. These variation group tables are variation group tables that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A459 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
As the variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the number of high-probability times is 0, the first reachless short system, the N reach short system, the no reach system, the N reach system, There are an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system, and a distribution rate is set for each. For example, when the first non-reach short variation group is selected, the variation pattern of the short variation without reach for the first variation time (2.0 seconds in this modification) is selected. .

  In addition, as a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the number of times of high probability is one, the second reachless short system, the N reach short system, the no reach system, the N reach System, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system, each with a distribution rate. For example, when the second reachless short fluctuation group is selected, the short fluctuation without reach of the second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in this modification) longer than the first fluctuation time is selected. The variation pattern is selected.

  In addition, as a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the number of times of high probability is two, the third reachless short system, the N reach short system, the no reach system, the N reach System, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system, each with a distribution rate. Then, for example, when the third reachable short variation group is selected, the short variation without reach of the third variation time (2.2 seconds in the case of this modification) longer than the second variation time. The variation pattern is selected.

  In addition, as a variation group (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the high probability medium count is 3 times or more, the fourth reachless short system, the N reach short system, the no reach system, N There are a reach system, an SP1 reach system, an SP2 reach system, and an SP3 reach system, and a distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the fourth reachless variation group is selected, the short variation without reach of the fourth variation time (2.3 seconds in the case of this modification) longer than the third variation time. The variation pattern is selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (d), in this modified example, during the period of high probability, the variation time of the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern of non-reach short variation depends on the number of times with high probability. Are different. Specifically, when the number of high-probability medium times is 0, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (in the case of this modification, the fluctuation pattern) The fluctuation pattern of time 2.0 seconds) is selected. On the other hand, when the number of high-probability times is 1 or more, a change pattern with a long change time (change time 2 in the case of this modification) is used as a change pattern of the short reachless change executed during the high-probability state period. ... (Variation pattern of 1 second or more) is selected, and as the number of high-probability mediums increases, the fluctuation time of short fluctuation without reach increases.

  Thus, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (period of the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state to occur (the period of the second high probability state) and the period of the second high probability state will be longer than the period of the first high probability state. Since it becomes high, it is possible to reduce the short-time ball-out rate, and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

Furthermore, the possibility that the period of the high probability state becomes longer as the number of times that the high probability state continuously occurs increases (in the case of this modification, the second time than the period of the first high probability state). The high probability state period is likely to be longer, and the third high probability state period is more likely to be longer than the second high probability state period). It is possible to effectively prevent the property from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98 (b), for example, the fluctuation pattern of the first reachless short fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the deviation fluctuation executed during the first high probability state period. As the fluctuation pattern of the outlier fluctuation executed during the period of the third high probability state, the second fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation without reach is selected, and as the fluctuation pattern of the outlier fluctuation executed during the period of the third high probability state. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example when a variation pattern of a third short reach variation without reach is selected.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the same variation group table is selected when the high probability medium count is 3 or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. That is, even when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, different variation group tables may be selected according to the high probability medium count. In addition, even when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, a different variation group table is selected according to the high probability medium count, and the fluctuation of short reach without fluctuation increases as the high probability medium count increases. It is also possible to make the time longer.

In addition, if the configuration of this modification is applied, it is possible to lengthen the time-short period.
Specifically, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special figure short time at a predetermined timing, the number of short hours and medium times is cleared to 0 and the special game state this time is special. If it is based on winning in the figure, the number of times with the time is updated by +1.
When the number of times with a short time is 0, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the short variation without reach executed during the short time state. On the other hand, when the number of times with a short time is 1 or more, a variation pattern of a variation time longer than the first variation time is selected as a variation pattern of the short variation without reach executed during the time reduction state, It is also possible to configure so that the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation without reach increases as the number of times with short time increases.

  As a result, the time-short state period (the first time-short state period) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state based on hits other than the special figure short-time and the end of the special gaming state based on the special figure short-time hits There is a higher possibility that the time-short state period that occurs later (second time-short state period) and the second time-short state period will be longer than the first time-short-state period. In addition, it is possible to reduce the short-term launch rate and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

In Modification 2-1, the first variation time is set to 2.0 seconds and the second variation time is set to 2.1 seconds. However, the first variation time and the second variation are not limited to this. The time can be changed as appropriate. When the difference between the first variation time and the second variation time is small as in this modification, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variation time of the short variation without reach has increased.
The same applies to the modified example 2-2. That is, the first variation time, the second variation time, the third variation time, and the fourth variation time can be changed as appropriate. When the difference between the first variation time and the second variation time, the difference between the second variation time and the third variation time, or the difference between the third variation time and the fourth variation time is small as in this modification It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation without reach has been extended.

  Here, in the modified example 2-1, the effect control apparatus 300 starts when the variation time starts and when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected. Only the tempo of the effect is changed so that the state of the effect at the end (for example, the state of decoration (light emission) by the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 44, the state of the output sound from the speakers 19a, 19b) matches. (Specifically, when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected, the effect tempo may be slowed down). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the short change without reach has been extended.

For example, when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected, and when the tempo of the production is the same, the end of the first variation time and the second variation time are selected. At the end of the two fluctuation times, the decoration LED's light emission mode is different or the sound output from the speakers 19a, 19b is different. Due to such a difference (difference in the state of the effect at the end of the change time), the player may notice that the change time of the reachless short change has increased. On the other hand, by changing only the tempo of the production so that such a difference does not occur, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the short reach-less fluctuation has increased.
The same applies to the modified example 2-2. That is, in the modification 2-2, the effect control device 300 performs the variation pattern of the third variation time when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected, the variation pattern of the second variation time, and the variation pattern of the third variation time. Only the tempo of the effect is changed so that the state of the effect at the start and end of the change time coincides with when the change pattern of the fourth change time is selected. Also good. Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the short change without reach has been extended.

  Further, in the modified example 2-1, it may be configured such that the second and subsequent high probability state periods are more likely to be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the non-reach short variation executed during the period of the high probability state. To do. On the other hand, when the high probability flag is saved, a variation pattern having a variation time shorter than the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the short reach-less variation executed during the period of the high probability state. May be. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

  In Modification 2-2, the probability that the period of the high probability state may be short may be increased as the number of times the high probability state is continuously generated increases. Specifically, for example, when the high probability medium number is 0, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the non-reach short variation executed during the period of the high probability state. To do. On the other hand, when the number of times with high probability is 1 or more, a variation pattern with a variation time shorter than the first variation time is selected as a variation pattern of short variation without reach executed during the period of the high probability state. Further, the variation time of the short reach-less variation may be shortened as the high probability medium number increases. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example 2-1 and the modified example 2-2 allows the player to play a game when the result of the variation display game (special drawing variation display game) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a gaming value to the game machine, after the special gaming state ends, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the case of this modification, the probability variation operation area switch 38d has detected a gaming ball). , A specific state (high probability state in the case of this variation) is generated, which is likely to have a special game state occurrence timing earlier than the normal state (low probability state (normal probability state in the case of this variation)) Specific state generation means (game control device 100), variation pattern selection means (game control device 100) for selecting a variation pattern of the variation display game, and variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means Includes a presentation control means for executing the corresponding effect (the effect control device 300), the. A variable display game that is executed during a specific state (first high probability state) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the normal state, and the result does not result in a special result. A variation display game that is executed during a specific state (second and subsequent high probability states) that occurs after the end of a special game state based on a variation display game that is executed during a specific state, where the game is a normal variation display game. When the variation display game with no special result is a specific variation display game, the variation pattern for identification having the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the specific variation display game (for example, the variation pattern of the second short reach variation without reach) is The normal variation pattern having the highest selection ratio among the variation patterns of the normal variation display game (for example, the variation of the first short reach variation without reach). The variation control time is longer than the pattern), and the effect control means changes only the common effect (in the case of this modification, only the tempo) when the specific variation pattern is selected and when the normal variation pattern is selected. Can be performed).

Therefore, the period of the specific state (period of the first specific state) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the normal state, and the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the specific state There is a high possibility that the period of the specific state that occurs after the end of the period (the period of the specific state after the second time), and the period of the specific state after the second will be longer than the period of the first specific state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
In addition, the player is aware that the variation pattern for specific use (for example, the variation pattern for the second short variation without reach) has a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern for the first short variation without reach). Can be difficult to notice.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example 2-2, the identification that the number of consecutive occurrences, which is the number of times the specific state continuously occurs, is executed during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state). The variable display game is the first specific variable display game, and the specific variable display game that is executed during the second specific state (for example, the third high probability state) in which the number of consecutive occurrences is greater than the first number is the second. In the case of the specific variation display game, the second specific variation pattern (for example, the third variation variation pattern without reach) having the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the second specific variation display game is the first specific variation. The variation time is longer than the first specifying variation pattern (for example, the second variation variation pattern with no reach) having the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the display game, and the production control means (production control device 3 0) executes a common effect (effect in which only the tempo is changed in the case of this modification) when the second specifying variation pattern is selected and when the first specifying variation pattern is selected. Is possible.

  Therefore, since the possibility that the period of the specific state becomes longer as the number of times that the specific state continuously occurs increases, it is possible to effectively prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  Further, in the gaming machines 10 of the modified example 2-1 and modified example 2-2, the specific state is that the probability that the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) will be a special result is a normal state (low probability state). It is a high probability variation state (high probability state) compared to.

Therefore, it is more likely that the period of the second or later probability change state (high probability state) is longer than the period of the first probability change state (high probability state). Can be prevented.
The specific state may be an electric support state (short time state) in which a game ball is likely to win a normal electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37). In other words, the specific state may be a state that is a probability variation state but is not an electric support state, or may be a state that is not a probability variation state but is an electric support state, or is a probability variation state and an electric support state. It may be in a state.

<Modification 3>
Further, as a technique for lengthening the period of the high probability state, for example, there is a technique of providing a preparation time between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state period.
When no preparation time is provided between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 98 (c), When the variation time ends (t141) and a stop display time (display time set in step A603) for displaying the result of the one special figure fluctuation display game has elapsed (t142), the next special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Be started.

  On the other hand, when a preparation time is provided between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game, for example, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. When the variation time ends (t151) and the stop display time (display time set in step A603) for displaying the result of the one special figure variation display game has elapsed (t152), the preparation time is started. When the preparation time elapses (t153), the next special figure variation display game is started. In the preparation time, like the stop display time, since the special symbol is stopped, the stop display time (symbol stop time) is apparently extended by providing the preparation time.

<Modification 3-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), this special game state is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state). If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
When the low probability medium flag is saved, no preparation time is provided between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. . On the other hand, when the high-probability flag is saved, a preparation time (for example, 400 milliseconds) is set between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the period of the high probability state. It can also be configured to be provided.

  Thus, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (period of the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability Since the period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the second and subsequent high probability states) and the period of the second and subsequent high probability states are longer than the period of the first high probability state. It is possible to reduce the time-out pitching rate and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  In this modification, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the preparation time is between the one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the preparation time may be provided even when the low probability medium flag is saved. Also, in this configuration, if the length of the preparation time is longer when the high probability medium flag is saved than when the low probability medium flag is saved, the first high probability The period of the high probability state after the second time is longer than the period of the state.

In addition, if the configuration of this modification is applied, it is possible to lengthen the time-short period.
More specifically, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special-time shortage at a predetermined timing, the short-time / non-short-time flag is saved, and the current special game state is special-purpose. If it is based on a win in the short time, save the short in time flag.
Then, when the no-short-time flag is saved, no preparation time is provided between the one special figure variation display game executed during the time-short state period and the next special figure variation display game. On the other hand, when the shortage flag is saved, it is possible to provide a preparation time between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game that are executed during the shortage state. Is possible.

  As a result, the time-short state period (the first time-short state period) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state based on hits other than the special figure short-time and the end of the special gaming state based on the special figure short-time hits Since the time-short state period that occurs later (the second and subsequent time-short state period) and the first time-short state period are longer than the first time-short-state period, a short time is required. It is possible to reduce the sphericity and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

<Modification 3-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the special game state this time is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state). The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium number is updated by +1 if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability.
When the high probability medium count is 0, no preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period and the next special figure variation display game. . On the other hand, if the number of times during high probability is 1 or more, a preparation time is provided between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. It is also possible to configure such that the preparation time becomes longer as the number of times during the probability increases. Specifically, for example, the first preparation time (for example, 200 msec) is set when the number of high-probability times is one, and the first preparation time is set when the number of high-probability times is two. A long second preparation time (for example, 400 milliseconds) is set, and when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, a third preparation time (for example, 600 milliseconds) longer than the second preparation time is set.

Thus, after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (period of the first high probability state) generated after the end of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability Since the period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the second and subsequent high probability states) and the period of the second and subsequent high probability states are longer than the period of the first high probability state. It is possible to reduce the time-out pitching rate and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
Further, the period of the high probability state becomes longer as the number of times the high probability state is continuously generated (in the case of this modification, the second high probability state is longer than the period of the first high probability state). The period is longer and the period of the third high probability state is longer than the period of the second high probability state). Can do.

  In addition, in this modification, when the number of times of high probability is 0, the preparation time between one special figure variation display game executed during the period of the high probability state and the next special figure variation display game However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the preparation time may be provided even when the high probability medium count is zero. Further, in this configuration, if the length of the preparation time is longer when the high probability medium count is 1 or more than when the high probability medium count is 0, the first high time The period of the high probability state after the second time is longer than the period of the probability state.

  In the present modification, the same preparation time (specifically, the third preparation time) is set when the number of times with a high probability is three or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even when the number of times with high probability is three or more, different preparation times may be set according to the number of times with high probability. Furthermore, when the high probability medium count is 3 times or more, the preparation time is set differently depending on the high probability medium count, and the set preparation time becomes longer as the high probability medium count increases. It is also possible to configure.

In addition, if the configuration of this modification is applied, it is possible to lengthen the time-short period.
Specifically, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special figure short time at a predetermined timing, the number of short hours and medium times is cleared to 0 and the special game state this time is special. If it is based on winning in the figure, the number of times with the time is updated by +1.
When the number of times with a short time is 0, the preparation time is not provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the time reduction state. On the other hand, if there is a short time and the number of times is 1 or more, a preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game to be executed during the time reduction state, and there is a short time. It is also possible to configure such that the preparation time becomes longer as the medium number increases.

  As a result, the time-short state period (the first time-short state period) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state based on hits other than the special figure short-time and the end of the special gaming state based on the special figure short-time hits Since the time-short state period that occurs later (the second and subsequent time-short state period) and the first time-short state period are longer than the first time-short-state period, a short time is required. It is possible to reduce the sphericity and to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.

  Further, in the modified example 3-1, the second high probability state period may be configured to be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, a preparation time is set between one special figure fluctuation display game and the next special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state period. Configure to provide. On the other hand, when the high-probability flag is saved, a preparation time is not provided between one special figure fluctuation display game executed during the high probability state and the next special figure fluctuation display game. May be. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

  In Modification 3-2, the period of the high probability state may be configured to be shorter as the number of times the high probability state is continuously generated increases. Specifically, for example, a preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state and the next special figure variation display game regardless of the number of times during the high probability state. In addition, the preparation time may be shortened as the number of high probability times increases. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

<Modification 4>
In addition, as a technique for reducing the number of occurrences of the special gaming state per unit time, for example, a technique for increasing the period of the special gaming state can be given.
As a method for extending the period of the special game state, for example, there is a method for extending at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time.

<Modification 4-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the current special game state is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the special game state). If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
When the low probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one).

[Special figure display processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), the game control apparatus 100 according to the present modification executes the special figure display process shown in FIG. 110 instead of the special figure display process shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 110, in the special figure display process of the present modification, the current hit probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is executed between step A715 and step A716. This is different from the special figure display processing (see FIG. 52) of the embodiment.

In the current hit probability state flag setting process, first, it is determined whether the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability and a short time (step A725).
If the current special game state is based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A725; Y), a high probability medium flag is saved in the current hit probability state flag area (step A726). The process proceeds to step A716.
On the other hand, if the current special gaming state is not based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A725; N), a low probability medium flag is saved in the current probability state flag area (step A727). Then, the process proceeds to step A716.

  In this modification, the current hit probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is executed between step A715 and step A716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The current hit probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is performed, for example, after the execution of the process (steps A705 and A706) of saving the test signal related to the start of the big hit of the special figure display game in the test signal output data area. As long as it is before the execution of the process (step A718) for saving the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in the special game process timer area, it may be executed at any timing.

  When the fanfare time is extended in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), the game control device 100 of the present modification uses the stop symbol pattern in the special figure display processing shown in FIG. Instead of the process of saving the corresponding jackpot fanfare time in the special game process timer area (step A718), the special jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the flag and stop symbol pattern saved in the current hit probability state flag area is specially shown. A process of saving in the game process timer area (step A718a) is executed.

In step A718a, for example, if the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is a low probability medium flag, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (here, 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms). Save one of the seconds) in the special game process timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is a high probability medium flag, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (here, either 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) ) And a time value obtained by adding a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 milliseconds) to the special game process timer area.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the interval time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modified example is replaced with FIG. The large winning opening shown process is executed.
As shown in FIG. 111, in the big prize opening opening process of this modification, instead of the process of saving the special prize opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game processing timer area (step A907). The above-described point that the flag saved in the hit probability state flag area, the winning prize opening data, and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds is saved in the special-purpose game process timer area (step A907a) is executed. This is different from the large winning opening opening process in the embodiment (see FIG. 59).

In step A907a, for example, when the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is a low probability medium flag, the interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening data and the number of rounds (here, 300 msec, 900 m Seconds or 1300 milliseconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, if the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is a high probability flag, the interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening data and the number of rounds (here 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 m) A time value obtained by adding a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 milliseconds) to any one of the seconds) is saved in the special game process timer area.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the ending time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modified example replaces the big winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. The large winning opening remaining ball processing shown is executed.
As shown in FIG. 112, in the big winning opening remaining ball processing of this variation, instead of the processing (step A954) for saving the ending time corresponding to the big winning opening release data in the special game processing timer area (step A954), The point that the flag saved in the time probability state flag area and the ending time corresponding to the big prize opening data is saved in the special game process timer area (step A954a) is executed. This is different from the remaining ball processing (see FIG. 61).

In step A954a, for example, when the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is a low probability medium flag, the ending time corresponding to the big winning opening release data (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 msec) is saved in the special game process timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is a high-probability flag, the ending time (100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms here) corresponding to the big prize opening release data is used. And a time value obtained by adding a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 milliseconds) to the special game process timer area.

  As a result, the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability (the period of the first special gaming state) and the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (the second and subsequent special gaming state The period of the special game state after the first time is longer than the period of the first special game state, so that the short-time launch rate can be reduced and the gambling is high. It can be prevented from becoming too much.

  In this modification, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). It is not limited to. That is, even when the low probability medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one). Also, in this configuration, if the additional time is longer when the high probability medium flag is saved than when the low probability medium flag is saved, the first special game The period of the special game state after the second time becomes longer than the period of the state.

Also, in this modification, for example, if the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special drawing time shortage at a predetermined timing, the timeless / non-time flag is saved and the current special game state is saved. If is based on a hit in the special time map, save the time flag.
Then, when the short / no-time flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). On the other hand, when the shortage / medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one).

  As a result, the special gaming state period based on the hits other than during the special drawing time (the first special gaming state period) and the special gaming state period based on the special drawing hours (the second and subsequent special games). In the gaming state period), the second and subsequent special gaming state periods are longer than the first special gaming state period. It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

<Modification 4-2>
Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), when the special game state of this time is based on a hit with a low probability at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the special game state). The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and the high probability medium number is updated by +1 if the current special game state is based on a hit with a high probability.
When the high probability medium count is 0, none of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (additional time is not added to any of them). On the other hand, if the high probability medium count is 1 or more, at least one of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (additional time is added to at least one), and the high probability medium count is large. It is also possible to configure so that the additional time to be added increases as the time increases.

[Special figure display processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes a special figure display process shown in FIG. 113 in place of the special figure display process shown in FIG. .
As shown in FIG. 113, in the special figure display processing of the present modification, the high probability medium number setting processing (steps A728 to A730) is executed between step A715 and step A716. This is different from the special figure display processing (see FIG. 52).

In the high probability medium number setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current special game state is based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A728).
When the special gaming state this time is based on a hit with high probability & short time (step A728; Y), the value of the high probability medium number area (high probability medium number) is updated by +1 (step A729). ), The process proceeds to step A716.
On the other hand, if the special gaming state this time is not based on a hit with a high probability & short time (step A728; N), the high probability medium frequency area is cleared to 0 (step A730) and the processing of step A716 is performed. Transition.

  In this modification, the high probability medium number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is executed between step A715 and step A716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability medium number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is stopped after execution of the process (steps A705 and A706) for saving the test signal related to the big hit of the special figure variation display game in the test signal output data area, for example. The jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the symbol pattern may be executed at any timing as long as it is before execution of the process (step A718) for saving the special game process timer area.

  Then, in order to extend the fanfare time in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), the game control device 100 of the present modification uses the stop symbol pattern in the special figure display processing shown in FIG. Instead of the process of saving the corresponding jackpot fanfare time in the special figure game process timer area (step A718), the process of saving the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the high probability medium count and the stop symbol pattern in the special figure game process timer area ( Step A718b) is executed.

In step A718b, for example, when the high probability medium count is 0, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (in this case, either 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) is displayed as a special game processing timer. Save to area.
On the other hand, when the high probability medium count is 1, a predetermined first additional time (eg, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) corresponding to the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (for example, either 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) The time value obtained by adding (400 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the high probability medium number is 2, a predetermined second additional time (for example, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) corresponding to the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (for example, either 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) The time value obtained by adding (600 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the high probability medium count is 3 times or more, a predetermined third additional time (100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) corresponding to the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (here, either 100 ms, 2500 ms, or 500 ms) For example, a time value obtained by adding 800 milliseconds is saved in the special game process timer area.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), when the interval time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modified example is replaced with FIG. 114 in place of the big prize opening opening process shown in FIG. The large winning opening shown process is executed.
As shown in FIG. 114, in the process of opening the big prize opening of the present modification, instead of the process (step A907) for saving the big prize opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game process timer area. The processing for saving the high-probability number of times, the big winning opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game processing timer area (step A907b) is executed. (See FIG. 59).

In step A907b, for example, when the high probability medium count is 0, special winning opening data and an interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (in this case, either 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 msec) are specified. Save to the game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the number of high-probability times is one, the predetermined first opening time is set at the interval time (300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms here) corresponding to the winning prize opening data and the number of rounds. The time value obtained by adding the additional time (for example, 400 milliseconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the number of times with a high probability is 2, the predetermined second opening data is received at the interval time (300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms here) corresponding to the winning prize opening data and the number of rounds. The time value obtained by adding the additional time (for example, 600 milliseconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the number of times with high probability is 3 times or more, a predetermined number of times is given during the interval time (in this case, either 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 msec) corresponding to the prize winning opening data and the number of rounds. The time value obtained by adding 3 additional times (for example, 800 milliseconds) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
When the ending time is extended in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109 (b), the game control device 100 of the present modified example replaces the big winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. The large winning opening remaining ball processing shown is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115, in the big winning opening remaining ball processing of this modification, instead of the processing (step A954) for saving the ending time corresponding to the big winning opening release data in the special game processing timer area (step A954), high probability The point that the processing (step A954b) for saving the ending time corresponding to the medium number of times and the special winning opening release data in the special game processing timer area is executed (step A954b) is the same as the special winning feature remaining ball processing (see FIG. 61) of the above embodiment. Different.

In step A954b, for example, when the high probability medium count is 0, the ending time (in this case, either 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening data is displayed as a special game process. Save to the timer area.
On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is one time, a predetermined first additional time (100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the ending time corresponding to the big prize opening release data (here, either 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) For example, a time value obtained by adding 400 ms is saved in the special game process timer area.

In addition, when the number of high-probability times is 2, a predetermined second additional time (100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the ending time corresponding to the big opening opening data (here, either 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) The time value obtained by adding (for example, 600 milliseconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the high probability medium count is 3 times or more, a predetermined third additional time is added to the ending time (in this case, either 100 msec, 2300 msec, or 2700 msec) corresponding to the prize winning opening data. The time value obtained by adding (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

As a result, the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the low probability (the period of the first special gaming state) and the period of the special gaming state based on the hit in the high probability (the second and subsequent special gaming state The period of the special game state after the first time is longer than the period of the first special game state, so that the short-time launch rate can be reduced and the gambling is high. It can be prevented from becoming too much.
Furthermore, the period of the special gaming state becomes longer as the number of times that the high probability state is continuously generated (that is, the number of times that the special gaming state is continuously generated) increases (in the case of this modification, the first special state is generated). The period of the second special gaming state is longer than the period of the gaming state, and the period of the third special gaming state is longer than the period of the second special gaming state). It is possible to effectively prevent the property from becoming too high.

  In this modification, when the high probability medium count is 0, the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). It is not limited to. That is, even when the high probability medium count is 0, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one). In addition, when configured in this way, if the length of the additional time is longer when the high probability medium count is 1 or more than when the high probability medium count is 0, the first special time The second and subsequent special gaming state periods are longer than the gaming state period.

  In the present modification, the same additional time (specifically, the third additional time) is added when the high-probability medium count is 3 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even when the high probability medium count is 3 or more, a different additional time may be added depending on the high probability medium count. Furthermore, even when the high probability medium number is 3 times or more, it is configured to add different additional time according to the high probability medium number, and the additional time to be added becomes longer as the high probability medium number increases. It is also possible to configure.

  For example, when the high probability medium number is the first number (for example, one time), one of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended, and the high probability medium number is greater than the first number. When the number of times is a large second number (for example, two times), any two of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are extended, and the third number of times that the high-probability medium number is larger than the second number (for example, 3 times), the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time can all be extended.

Also, in this modification, for example, when the current special game state is based on a hit other than the special drawing short time at a predetermined timing, the number of times with short time is cleared to 0, and this special game When the state is based on the hit in the special drawing time, the number of times with the time is updated by +1.
When the number of times is short and the number of times is 0, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). On the other hand, if the number of times with a short time is 1 or more, at least one of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (additional time is added to at least one), and the number of times with short time is high. It is also possible to configure so that the additional time to be added increases as the time increases.

  As a result, the special gaming state period based on the hits other than during the special drawing time (the first special gaming state period) and the special gaming state period based on the special drawing hours (the second and subsequent special games). In the gaming state period), the second and subsequent special gaming state periods are longer than the first special gaming state period. It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

In the modified example 4-1 and modified example 4-2, it is possible to extend the remaining ball processing time in order to lengthen the period of the special gaming state.
Moreover, in the modification 4-1 and the modification 4-2, the production control device 300 counts the number of times with high probability (or the number of consecutive games), and increases the number of times with high probability (or the number of consecutive games). Accordingly, the selection rate of a predetermined effect executed during the special game state (for example, a promotion effect executed during the interval) may be increased.

  Further, in the modification 4-1 and the modification 4-2, for example, when extending the ending time, the effect control device 300 determines that the ending time corresponding to the big prize opening opening data (here, 100 milliseconds, 2300 milliseconds, Or any one of 2700 milliseconds), and after the ending effect is finished, an additional effect of displaying the game history or displaying the company logo in the extended time (additional time) is performed. It is possible to configure. Furthermore, when comprised in this way, a liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the display device 41 which consists of three 7-segment displays, and the said additional effect may be performed using the liquid crystal display device.

  Moreover, in the modified example 4-1, the period of the second and subsequent special gaming states may be configured to be shorter than the first special gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time may not be extended. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

  Moreover, in the modification 4-2, you may comprise so that the period of a special game state may become a short period, so that the frequency | count that a high probability state generate | occur | produces continuously increases. Specifically, for example, it is configured to extend at least one of the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time regardless of the high probability medium number, and the additional time to be added becomes shorter as the high probability medium number increases. You may comprise. Also when comprised in this way, it can prevent that euphoria becomes high too much.

<Modification 5>
In the ending effect that suggests the end of the special game state, for example, the probability state of the special figure change display game after the end of the special game state is notified.
If the specific round (lever solenoid operation round) is a round other than the final round, the probability state after the end of the special game state is fixed by the start of the ending effect, so the ending by the start of the ending effect It is possible to determine the production mode of the production (a mode for notifying that the state is a high probability state or a mode for notifying that the state is a low probability state).

On the other hand, when the specific round (lever solenoid operation round) is the final round, a time (residual sphere monitoring time) for monitoring the remaining sphere in the probability variation operating region 38h during the ending effect is often set. In that case, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may not be determined by the start of the ending effect. If the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not confirmed by the start of the ending effect, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state can only be vaguely notified by the ending effect, and the player may be misidentified. is there. That is, when the specific round is the final round, the ending effect may be an unreliable effect.
Therefore, in the present modification, when the specific round (lever solenoid operation round) is the final round, the effect mode of the ending effect can be switched during the ending effect so that a highly reliable ending effect can be executed.

In FIG. 116, the opening mode in each round with each jackpot type is shown.
As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the case of this modification, in the 12R probability variation, the lower V opening that opens the first special variation winning device 38 is performed in the final round (the 12th round). From the first round to the eleventh round, the upper long opening that opens the second special variable winning device 39 and the lower long opening that opens the first special variable winning device 38 are alternately performed.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 116 (b) and 116 (d), the 5R probability variation and the 4R probability variation whose jackpot type is a certain variation are similarly applied to the first special variation winning device in the final round (the fifth round and the fourth round). Open the lower V opening 38.
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 116 (c) and 116 (e), in the case of 5R normal and 4R normal in which the big hit type is normal, the first special variable winning device 38 is provided in the final round (fifth round and fourth round). Open the lower short to open.

In any type of jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are configured to be alternately opened, so that a predetermined number of game balls have been won or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. When the predetermined interval time has elapsed after the round has ended, the other special variable winning device is released.
It should be noted that the game balls can be allowed to flow into the probability changing operation region 38h only in the lower V opening and the lower short opening performed in the final round. In the upper long opening and the upper short opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, so there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h. Further, in the lower long opening or the lower short opening that is not the final round, the lever member 38i is not operated, so there is no possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h. In other words, in the gaming machine of Modification 5 (Modifications 5-1 to 5-5), the specific round, which is a round in which a game ball may flow into the probability changing operation area 38h forming the specific area, is the final round. is there.

<Modification 5-1>
FIG. 117 shows the details of the open mode. The details of the upper long opening, the upper short opening, the lower long opening, and the opening of the lower short opening that is not the final round are the same as those in the above embodiment (see FIG. 8), and are therefore omitted.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the lower V release of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t31). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t32). When the remaining ball monitoring time (100 ms in the case of this modification) elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t33).

  When 200 ms elapses from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is released again (t35), and the condition of whether a 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. If established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, the round is ended, and the lower major winning port remaining ball processing time is started (t39).

In addition, after the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability changing operation region switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the lever solenoid 38f is kept on for a long time, so that the game ball flows almost certainly into the probability changing operation region 38h. It will be. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.
Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43). The inflowing game ball can also flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.

  The first special variable winning device 38 is closed by the elapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is within the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time. If not all discharged and not exhausted by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the lever is reached at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). The solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation. When the remaining ball monitoring time (100 ms in the case of this modification) elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).

  In the above embodiment, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the available time has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls have won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is When all of the balls are discharged within the winning prize remaining ball processing time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the lower winning prize winning ball remaining ball processing time (t42), and the operation ends. Although the switch 38d is configured to be disabled, in this modification, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), and the operation is finished. When the remaining ball monitoring time (100 ms in the case of the present modification) elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operating region scan is exceeded. Pitch 38d becomes invalid (t44).

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed by elapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of game balls wins, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are lowered. If all the balls are not discharged within the winning prize remaining ball processing time, and if all are discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the lever solenoid 38f will be displayed when the discharge is completed. In this modification, the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) also has been configured so that the probability variation operating region switch 38d is disabled. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation, and after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, When spheres monitoring time (in the present modification 100 ms) has elapsed, the invalid probability variation operating range switch 38d (t44).

  That is, in this modification, in any case, at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is finished, and the lever solenoid 38f is turned off. When the remaining sphere monitoring time (100 ms in the case of the present modification) elapses, the probability variation operation region switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).

In the lower V opening of this modification, the production control device 300 executes the round production from the start to the end of the round (t31 to t39), and at the start of the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time (t39), An ending effect is started based on the ending command from the game control device 100.
Specifically, in the initial performance mode in which the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is not notified from the start of the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time to the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time (t39 to t44). Perform the ending production.

If the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in “(1) Production” in FIG. 117 (a), from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t44 to t45). ), The ending effect is executed in a specific effect mode for notifying that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes a high probability state.
On the other hand, when the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIG. 117 (a), from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t44 to t45). ), The ending effect is executed in the normal effect mode for notifying that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state becomes the low probability state (normal probability state).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the lower short opening that is the final round of the present modification, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51). To t54), the round is ended based on the end of the opening (t54). Since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a very short time and the lever solenoid 38f is also ON for a short time, the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal.

Then, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid / invalid switching of the probability variation operation region switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of opening the lower V (t56 to t63).
Therefore, even when all the game balls won in the first special variable prize winning device 38 are discharged within the lower special prize winning device remaining ball processing time, the game balls won in the first special variable prize winning device 38 remain in the lower big prize winning port. Even when all the balls are not discharged within the ball processing time and all are discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the game balls won in the first special variable winning device 38 Is not exhausted within the processing time for the remaining ball of the lower prize winning opening, and when the lever solenoid 38f is not exhausted by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is ON. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period of time in which the state is reached (t62), and the operation is finished. Then, the lever solenoid 38f remains off after being turned off. When the monitoring time (in the present modification 100 ms) has elapsed, the invalid probability variation operating range switch 38d (t63).

  However, the lever solenoid 38f and the probability variation operating region switch 38d are controlled as shown in FIG. 117 (d) when the lower short is opened only when the lower short is opened in the final round. When the lower short is opened in other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated, and the probability change operation region switch 38d remains invalid.

In the lower short opening that is the final round of the present modification, the production control device 300 executes the round production from the start to the end of the round (t51 to t54), and starts the lower major prize winning port remaining ball processing time. Sometimes (t54), an ending effect is started based on the ending command from the game control device 100.
Specifically, the ending effect is executed in the initial effect mode from the beginning of the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time to the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time (t54 to t63).
If the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in “(1) Production” in FIG. 117 (b), from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t63 to t64). ), The ending effect is executed in the specific effect mode.
On the other hand, when the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIG. 117 (b), from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t63 to t64). ) The ending effect is executed in the normal effect mode.

In other words, in the present modification, the ending effect effects include an initial effect, a specific effect, and a normal effect.
When the ending effect is started in the initial effect mode and the V winning is successful (that is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be a high probability state), the timing at which the V winning is successful. Regardless, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched from the initial effect mode to the specific effect mode at the end of the remaining ball monitoring time during the ending effect (second remaining ball monitoring time in the case of this modification). On the other hand, when the V winning is unsuccessful (that is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be a low probability state), the remaining ball monitoring time during the ending effect (in the case of this modification, 2 At the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time), the ending effect effect mode is switched from the initial effect mode to the normal effect mode.

  In addition, in the lower V opening and lower short opening of this modification, as in the above embodiment, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are awarded, When all of the game balls won in the first special variable prize winning device 38 are discharged within the lower big prize winning opening remaining ball processing time, the lever solenoid is accompanied with the end of the lower big winning prize remaining ball processing time (t42, t56). It is also possible to configure so that the probability changing operation region switch 38d becomes invalid while the operation ends when 38f is turned off. Further, when configured in this way, for example, when the V winning is successful, the effect mode of the ending effect is changed from the initial effect mode to the specific effect mode at the end of the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time (t42, t56). When the V winning is unsuccessful, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched from the initial effect mode to the normal effect mode at the end of the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time (t42, t56). Also good.

  In addition, in the lower V opening and lower short opening of this modification, as in the above embodiment, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed by the elapse of the openable time or the winning of a predetermined number of game balls, Until all the game balls won in the first special variable winning device 38 are not discharged within the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time, until the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43, t62) In the case where the discharge is completed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed, and the operation is terminated, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is invalidated. Moreover, when comprised in this way, for example, when V winning is successful, when the end effect production mode is switched from the initial production mode to the specific production mode when the discharge is completed, and when the V winning is failed. May switch the effect mode of the ending effect from the initial effect mode to the normal effect mode when the discharge is completed.

The display device 41 may be configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT).
When configured in this way, in the ending effect of the initial effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), a special image is displayed by displaying a character image such as “Entering OO mode!” On the display device 41. Informs that the probability state after the end of the state is not fixed.
Further, in the ending effect of the specific effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 118B, the probability after the special game state is ended by displaying a character image such as “probability change mode entry!” On the display device 41. It is notified that the state has been determined to be a high probability state (probability variation state).

In the ending effect of the normal effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), the probability after the end of the special game state is displayed by displaying a character image such as “Time mode entry!” On the display device 41. It is informed that the state is determined not to be a high probability state, that is, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be a low probability state (normal probability state).
That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 118A to 118C, the ending effect effect mode is switched from the initial effect mode to the specific effect mode or the normal effect mode, so that the parameter to be reflected (here, “XX”). "Parameters to enter" are displayed.

Further, in the ending effect of the specific effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (d), an additional effect (in this case, an effect of displaying a character for probability change) can be configured. That is, it is also possible to configure so that an effect that is not performed in the ending effect of the initial effect mode is performed in the ending effect of the specific effect mode by switching the effect mode of the ending effect from the initial effect mode to the specific effect mode. .
In addition, it is possible to configure so that an effect that is not performed in the ending effect of the initial effect mode is performed in the ending effect of the normal effect mode by switching the effect mode of the ending effect from the initial effect mode to the normal effect mode. .

In addition, by changing the effect mode of the ending effect from the initial effect mode to the specific effect mode, for example, it is changed from FIG. 118 (a) to FIG. 118 (b), that is, only a part of the display content is not replaced. For example, it is possible to change from FIG. 118 (a) to FIG. 118 (e), that is, to replace the entire display content.
In addition, when the effect mode of the ending effect is switched from the initial effect mode to the normal effect mode, for example, FIG. 118 (a) is changed to FIG. 118 (c), that is, only a part of the display content is not replaced. The entire display content can be replaced.

[Main processing]
In order to realize the ending effect shown in FIG. 117, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the main process shown in FIG. 119 instead of the main process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 119, in the main process of this modification, the ending effect switching process (step C21) is executed between step C12 and step C13. The main process of the above embodiment (see FIG. 90). ) Is different.

[Big hit command processing]
In order to realize the ending effect shown in FIG. 117, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the jackpot command process shown in FIG. 120 instead of the jackpot command process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 120, in the jackpot command processing of the present modification, the processing in step C412, the processing in step C413, and the processing in steps C425 to C428 are not executed. 93).

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 121 (a) shows an ending effect setting process (step C423) in the jackpot command process of this modification. In this ending effect setting process, the ending effect of the initial effect mode is set (step C511), and the ending effect setting process is terminated.

[Ending effect switching process]
FIG. 121 (b) shows the ending effect switching process (step C21) in the main process described above. In this ending effect switching process, it is first determined whether or not the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect is over (step C521).
If it is determined in step C521 that it is not at the end of the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (step C521; N), the ending effect switching process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C521 that the remaining ball monitoring time during the ending effect has ended (step C521; Y), it is determined whether a probability change operation region passing command has been received from the game control device 100 ( Step C522).

If it is determined in step C522 that the probability changing operation region passing command has been received (step C522; Y), the effect mode of the ending effect is changed to the specific effect mode (step C523), and the ending effect switching process is ended. . Thus, for example, as shown in “(1) effect” in FIGS. 117A and 117B, the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (second remaining sphere monitoring time in the case of this modification) ends. Occasionally, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched from the initial effect mode to the specific effect mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C522 that the probability variation operating region passing command has not been received (step C522; N), the effect mode of the ending effect is changed to the normal effect mode (step C524), and the ending effect switching is performed. The process ends. Thus, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b), the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (second remaining sphere monitoring time in this modification) ends. Occasionally, the production mode of the ending production is switched from the initial production mode to the normal production mode.

<Modification 5-2>
The timing of switching the effect mode of the ending effect to the specific effect mode is not limited to the end of the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (in the case of this modification, the second remaining sphere monitoring time), and can be changed as appropriate. Yes, for example, it may be immediately after a successful V prize.
Specifically, when the V prize is successful before the start of the ending effect, for example, as shown in “(1) Effect” in FIGS. 122A and 122B, the specific effect mode (FIG. 118). The ending effect is started at (b). On the other hand, when the V winning is successful after the start of the ending effect, for example, as shown in “(2) Effect” in FIGS. 122A and 122B, the effect of the ending effect is immediately after the success. The mode may be switched from the initial performance mode (see FIG. 118A) to the specific performance mode (see FIG. 118B).

<Modification 5-3>
Instead of starting the ending effect in the initial effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 123, the ending effect may be started in the normal effect mode.
Specifically, in the lower V opening of the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the effect control device 300 sets the second remaining ball monitoring time from the start of the lower great winning prize remaining ball processing time. Until the end (t39 to t44), the ending effect is executed in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 118C).
When the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in “(1) effect” in FIG. 123 (a), the effect mode of the ending effect is switched, and the ending time from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time. Until the end of (t44 to t45), the ending effect is executed in the specific effect mode (see FIG. 118 (b)).
On the other hand, if the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIG. 123 (a), the ending from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time without switching the effect mode of the ending effect. During the period until the end of time (t44 to t45), the ending effect may be executed in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 118C).

Similarly, in the lower short opening that is the final round of the present modification, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), for example, the second remaining ball from the start of the lower major winning opening remaining ball processing time. Until the end of the monitoring time (t54 to t63), the ending effect is executed in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 118 (c)).
When the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in “(1) effect” in FIG. 123 (b), the effect mode of the ending effect is switched, and the ending time from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time. Until the end of (t63 to t64), the ending effect is executed in the specific effect mode (see FIG. 118 (b)).
On the other hand, if the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIG. 123 (b), the ending from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time without switching the effect mode of the ending effect. During the time until the end of time (t63 to t64), the ending effect may be executed in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 118C).

Note that the timing of switching the effect mode of the ending effect from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode is limited to the end of the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (second remaining sphere monitoring time in this modification). For example, it may be immediately after successful V winning.
Specifically, if the V winning is successful before the start of the ending effect, the ending effect is started in the specific effect mode. On the other hand, when the V winning is successful after the start of the ending effect, the effect mode of the ending effect may be switched from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode immediately after the success.

In addition, when the effect mode of the ending effect is switched from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode, for example, the configuration is changed from FIG. 118C to FIG. 118B, that is, only a part of the display content is replaced. For example, it is possible to change from FIG. 118 (c) to FIG. 118 (e), that is, to replace the entire display content.
In addition, it is possible to configure so that an effect not performed in the ending effect of the normal effect mode is performed in the ending effect of the specific effect mode by switching the effect mode of the ending effect from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode. .

[Main processing]
The main process of this modification is the same as the main process (see FIG. 119) of Modification 5-1 above.
That is, in order to realize the ending effect shown in FIG. 123, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the main process shown in FIG. 119 instead of the main process shown in FIG.

[Big hit command processing]
The jackpot command processing of the present modification is the same as the jackpot command processing (see FIG. 120) of the modification 5-1.
That is, in order to realize the ending effect shown in FIG. 123, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the jackpot command process shown in FIG. 120 instead of the jackpot command process shown in FIG.

[Ending effect setting process]
In order to realize the ending effect shown in FIG. 123, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 124 (a) instead of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 121 (a). To do.
As shown in FIG. 124 (a), in the ending effect setting process of this modification, the ending effect of the normal effect mode is set (step C531), and the ending effect setting process is ended.

[Ending effect switching process]
In order to realize the ending effect shown in FIG. 123, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the ending effect switching process shown in FIG. 124 (b) instead of the ending effect switching process shown in FIG. 121 (b). To do.
As shown in FIG. 124 (b), in the ending effect switching process of this modification, first, it is determined whether it is the end of the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (step C521).
If it is determined in step C521 that it is not at the end of the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (step C521; N), the ending effect switching process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C521 that the remaining ball monitoring time during the ending effect has ended (step C521; Y), it is determined whether a probability change operation region passing command has been received from the game control device 100 ( Step C522).

If it is determined in step C522 that the probability changing operation region passing command has been received (step C522; Y), the effect mode of the ending effect is changed to the specific effect mode (step C523), and the ending effect switching process is ended. . Thereby, for example, as shown in “(1) effect” in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (second remaining sphere monitoring time in the case of this modification) ends. Occasionally, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step C522 that the probability variation operation region passing command has not been received (step C522; N), the ending effect switching process is terminated without changing the effect mode of the ending effect. Thereby, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the remaining sphere monitoring time during the ending effect (second remaining sphere monitoring time in the case of this modification) ends. After that, the ending effect in the normal effect mode is executed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5-1, the modified example 5-2, and the modified example 5-3, the result of the variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays the plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a special result. In the case of a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the case of becoming a game, it can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special gaming state and an open state in which the game ball can win A special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) having a specific region (probability variation operating region 38h) into which a game ball can flow and a probability state in which a special result occurs is represented as a normal probability state (low probability state). ) And a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball that has won the special variable winning device has flowed into the specific area. Judgment means (game system) And 100), after the end of the final round in the special game state, and includes the the ending demonstration execution means for executing suggesting ending directing the end of the special game state (effect control device 300), the. The probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special gaming state to the normal probability state when the determination means does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is failed). In addition, when it is determined by the determination means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is successful), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the high probability state. Further, the determining means determines whether or not the game ball that has won the special variable winning device in the final round flows into the specific area, and at a predetermined time after the final round (in the case of this modification, the second remaining ball). The determination can be made until the end of the monitoring time. In addition, the ending effect executing means is configured to notify that the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the high probability state based on the determination that the game ball has flowed into the specific area. The ending effect can be executed in the effect mode, and during the ending effect, the effect mode of the ending effect can be switched from an aspect (initial effect mode or normal effect mode) different from the specific effect mode to the specific effect mode. .

  That is, since the determination means can determine until a predetermined time after the end of the final round, the probability state after the end of the special game state may be fixed during the ending effect, but the ending effect of the ending effect may be determined during the ending effect. The effect mode can be switched from a mode different from the specific mode to the specific mode. Therefore, since the ending effect of the aspect different from the specific effect aspect is executed before the probability state is determined, and the ending effect of the specific effect aspect can be executed after the probability state is determined, the player can play the special game state. It is possible to carry out a highly reliable ending effect without misidentifying the probability state after the end of.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5-1, the ending effect execution means (the effect control device 300) starts the ending effect in an initial effect mode that does not notify the probability state after the end of the special game state, and at a predetermined time ( In the case of this modification, when it is determined by the determination means (game control device 100) that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h) by the time when the second remaining ball monitoring time ends (V winning) In the case of success), after the predetermined time, the ending effect can be switched from the initial effect to the specific effect, and the game ball has flowed into the specific area by the determining means by the predetermined time. When it is not determined (when the V prize is unsuccessful), the ending effect is changed from the initial effect to the special game state after the predetermined time has elapsed. It is switchable to a normal representation embodiment for notifying that the probability state is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the completion (see FIG. 117 (a), (b)).
In other words, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5-1, based on the determination that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special game state is notified during the ending effect. Is possible.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an ending effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to maintain an interest in the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5-3, the ending effect execution means (the effect control device 300) notifies that the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the normal probability state (low probability state). The ending effect is started in the normal effect mode, and the game ball flows into the specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) by the determination means by a predetermined time point (in the case of this modification, the end time of the second remaining ball monitoring time). When it is determined that (the V winning is successful), the effect mode of the ending effect can be switched from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode (see FIGS. 123 (a) and (b)).

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an ending effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to maintain an interest in the game.

<Modification 5-4>
Rather than starting the ending effect immediately after the end of the final round, the period from the end of the final round to the end of the remaining ball monitoring time (second remaining ball monitoring time in this modification) is defined as an interval period. When the winning is successful, the ending effect is started in the specific effect mode (see FIG. 118 (b)) immediately after the end of the interval period, and when the V winning is unsuccessful, the normal period immediately after the interval period ends. You may comprise so that an ending effect may be started in the effect aspect (refer FIG.118 (c)).

Also, in the case of a configuration in which the ending effect is started immediately after the end of the interval period, for example, as shown in FIG. 125, the round effect can be continued during the interval period.
Specifically, in the lower V opening in the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 125 (a), the effect control device 300 performs the round effect from the start of the round to the end of the interval period (t31 to t44). Execute.
When the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in “(1) effect” in FIG. 125A, the ending effect is started in the specific effect mode immediately after the end of the interval period. That is, during the period from the end of the second remaining sphere monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t44 to t45), the ending effect is executed in the specific effect mode (see FIG. 118 (b)).
On the other hand, when the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIG. 125A, the ending effect is started in the normal effect mode immediately after the end of the interval period. That is, during the period from the end of the second remaining ball monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t44 to t45), the ending effect can be executed in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 118 (c)).

Similarly, in the lower short opening that is the final round of the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 125 (b), the effect control device 300 is from the start of the round to the end of the interval period (t51 to t63). Execute the round effect.
When the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in “(1) effect” in FIG. 125B, the ending effect is started in the specific effect mode immediately after the end of the interval period. That is, during the period from the end of the second remaining sphere monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t63 to t64), the ending effect is executed in the specific effect mode (see FIG. 118 (b)).
On the other hand, when the V winning is unsuccessful, for example, as shown in “(2) effect” in FIG. 125B, the ending effect is started in the normal effect mode immediately after the end of the interval period. That is, during the period from the end of the second remaining sphere monitoring time to the end of the ending time (t63 to t64), the ending effect can be executed in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 118 (c)).

Further, in the case of a configuration in which an ending effect is started immediately after the end of the interval period, for example, it is possible to perform an effect that informs the number of acquired balls during the interval period.
As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5-4, the ending effect can be started after the end of the interval period (the period from the end of the final round to the end of the remaining ball monitoring time). Therefore, since the ending effect is started after the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined, a highly reliable ending effect can be executed.

<Modification 5-5>
The effect mode of the ending effect may be different depending on whether the V winning is successful before the start of the ending effect and the successful V winning after the start of the ending effect.
Specifically, when the V prize is successful before the start of the ending effect, for example, as shown in “(1) Effect” in FIGS. 126A and 126B, the specific effect mode (FIG. 118). The ending effect is started at (b).

On the other hand, if the V winning is not successful before the start of the ending effect, for example, as shown in “(2) Effect” in FIGS. The ending effect is started at a). And even if the V winning is successful after the start of the ending effect, the ending effect is not changed without changing the effect mode of the ending effect as shown in “(2) Effect” in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), for example. Until the end of time, the ending effect may be executed in the initial effect mode.
As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 5-5, if the V winning is not successful before the start of the ending effect, whether or not the V winning is successful after the start of the ending effect is determined. Regardless, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not notified in the ending effect. That is, when the V winning is not successful before the start of the ending effect, the latent mode is set. Therefore, since the player does not perform an ambiguous ending effect that misidentifies the probability state after the end of the special gaming state, a highly reliable ending effect can be executed.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 8, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f (lever member 38i) and the probability change operation region switch by the lower V opening and the lower short opening that is the specific round (lever solenoid operation round). While making the switching of valid / invalid of 38d the same, by changing the opening mode of the first special variable prize-winning device 38, the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h in the lower V opening and the specific round Although the possibility that a game ball flows into the probability changing operation region 38h in opening the lower short, which is the eye, is different, the present invention is not limited to this and vice versa.
That is, while the lower V opening and the lower short opening that is the specific round are the same in the opening manner of the first special variable winning device 38, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f (lever member 38i) and the probability change operation region switch By changing the valid / invalid switching of 38d, there is a possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h when the lower V is released, and a game ball will flow into the probability variation operation region 38h when the lower short is opened in the specific round. The possibility may be different.

<Modification 6-1>
FIG. 127 shows details of the open mode. The details of the upper long opening, the upper short opening, the lower long opening, and the opening of the lower short opening that is not in the specific round are the same as those in the above embodiment (see FIG. 8), and are therefore omitted.

As shown in FIG. 127 (a), in the lower V release of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t161). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t162). When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 38d is disabled (t163).
Further, when a specified time (10000 ms in the case of this modification) elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is activated (t164).

  When either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Then, the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t165). Furthermore, if either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation. To do. Then, when the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t166).

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), in the lower short opening that is the specific round of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t171). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t172). When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t173).

When either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Then, the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t175).
Here, in the case of the lower short opening that is the specific round, the lever solenoid 38f is not turned on even after the specified time elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t174), and the probability change operation region switch 38d is not valid.

That is, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the lower V is opened in this modification, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on twice. Since the second ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability changing operation region 38h. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the lever solenoid 38f is turned on only once in the lower short opening that is the specific round of the present modification. And since this one ON state is a short time, possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal (non-probable variation).

[Shimodai prize exit switch monitoring process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 127, the game control apparatus 100 according to the present modification executes the lower prize winning switch switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 128 instead of the lower prize winning switch monitoring process shown in FIG. To do.
As shown in FIG. 128, in the lower prize port switch monitoring process of this modification, a process (step A212) for clearing the lever solenoid control timer area to 0 is executed between step A210 and step A211. This is different from the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (see FIG. 36) of the above embodiment.

  That is, in the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process of this modification, when the number of the big prize winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step A209; Y ) Clears the special figure game processing timer area to 0 (step A210) and clears the lever solenoid control timer area to 0 (step A212). As a result, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls have won from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation can be finished.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 127, the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes a lever solenoid control process shown in FIG. 129 instead of the lever solenoid control process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 129, in the lever solenoid control process of the present modification, if the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no-update code (step A1101; N), if the lever solenoid control timer is not 0, a process of updating −1 ( Step A1110) is different from the lever solenoid control process (see FIG. 65) of the above embodiment. The minimum value of the lever solenoid control timer is set to zero.

  If the value of the lever solenoid control timer is 0 (step A1103; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, it is determined whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1111). If it is a V easy symbol (step A1111; Y), a lever solenoid control table for probability change is set (step A1112), and the process proceeds to step A1105. On the other hand, if it is not a V easy symbol (step A1111; N) ) Is different from the lever solenoid control process of the above embodiment (see FIG. 65) in that the normal (non-probability change) lever solenoid control table is set (step A1113) and the process proceeds to step A1105.

  When the lever solenoid control processing sequentially updates the lever solenoid control pointer every time a predetermined time elapses and the lever solenoid control table for probability change is set, as shown in FIG. When ON / OFF is set and the probability change operation region switch 38d is enabled / disabled, on the other hand, when a normal lever solenoid control table is set, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the lever solenoid The ON / OFF of 38f is set, and the validity / invalidity of the probability changing operation region switch 38d is set.

When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid control pointer is set to “6”, so that the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled. Become. Then, after “6” is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, “−1” is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.
In this modified example, the case where the operation of the lever solenoid is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition is, for example, a case where the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol, and from the end of the first ON state of the lever solenoid 38f. This may be the case when the number of winning prize counts reaches or exceeds the upper limit before the specified time (10000 ms in the case of this modification) elapses.

  Here, in this modification, when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired at step A1106 of the lever solenoid control process is “3”, the lever solenoid control timer of the next operation acquired at the next step A1107. Is a value corresponding to 9900 ms (= 10000 ms−100 ms), and when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “4”, the next acquired in the next step A1107 The value of the lever solenoid control timer for operation is “a value corresponding to 14936 ms (= 25000 ms−64 ms−10000 ms)”.

  When the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “3”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer of the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is set to “a value corresponding to 9900 ms”. Accordingly, the lever solenoid control pointer is changed from “3” to “4” based on the fact that the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (the specified time has elapsed) with the -1 update of the lever solenoid control timer (step A1110). To switch to.

  When the lever solenoid control pointer for the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “4”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer for the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is set to “a value corresponding to 14936 ms”. By doing so, the lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “4” to “5” at the timing when the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. That is, based on the fact that the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 with the -1 update of the lever solenoid control timer (step A1110) (the openable time of the first special variable winning device 38 has elapsed), or round The lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (the lever solenoid control timer area has been cleared to 0) when the number of winnings in the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the game has reached a predetermined number (step A209; Y) Based on this, the lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “4” to “5”.

<Modification 6-2>
When the lower solenoid valve V is opened, the timing at which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on for the second time is not limited to when a specified time (for example, 10,000 ms) has elapsed from the end of the first ON state, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be when the number of winnings to the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the round reaches a specified number (for example, 3).

  FIG. 130 shows details of the open mode. The details of the upper long opening, the upper short opening, the lower long opening, and the opening of the lower short opening that is not in the specific round are the same as those in the above embodiment (see FIG. 8), and are therefore omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the lower V release of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t181). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t182). When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t183).
In addition, when a specified number of game balls (three in the case of this modification) win the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the probability changing operation region switch 38d is activated. (T184).

  When either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Then, the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t185). Furthermore, if either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation. To do. When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation region switch 38d is disabled (t186).

Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), in the lower short opening that is the specific round of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t191). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t192). Then, when the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t193).

When either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Then, the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t195).
Here, in the case of the lower short opening that is the specific round, even if a prescribed number of game balls have won the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the round (t194), the lever solenoid 38f is not turned on. The probability change operation region switch 38d is not effective.

That is, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), when the lower V is opened in this modification, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on twice. Since the second ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability changing operation region 38h. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the lever solenoid 38f is turned on only once in the lower short opening that is the specific round of this modification. And since this one ON state is a short time, possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal (non-probable variation).

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 130, the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG. 131 instead of the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 131, in the fanfare / interval processing in this modification, when the lever solenoid operation round is set (step A859; Y), first, an initial value (in the case of this modification, “ 3 ") (step A870), then the lever solenoid operation data is set (step A860), and the process proceeds to step A863. The processing during the fanfare / interval of the above embodiment (see FIG. 56). ) Is different.

[Shimodai prize exit switch monitoring process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 130, the game control apparatus 100 according to the present modification executes the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 132 instead of the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. To do.
As shown in FIG. 132, in the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process of the present modification, a process of clearing the lever solenoid control timer area to 0 (step A212) is performed between step A210 and step A211. This is different from the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (see FIG. 36) of the above embodiment.

  That is, in the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process of this modification, when the number of the big prize winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step A209; Y ) Clears the special figure game process timer area to 0 (step A210) and clears the lever solenoid control timer area to 0 (step A212). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls have won from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation can be finished.

  When the number of winning prizes is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A209; N), the specified number count number (value of the specified number count number area) is updated by -1 (step A213), and the specified number It is determined whether the count number has become 0 (step A214). If the specified number count number is not 0 (step A214; N), the lower large prize opening switch monitoring process ends, while the specified number count number Is 0 (step A214; Y), the lever solenoid control timer area is cleared to 0 (step A215), and the lower large prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This is different from the switch monitoring process (see FIG. 36).

That is, in the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process of this modification, when the specified number count is 0 (step A214; Y), the lever solenoid control timer area is cleared to 0 (step A215). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 130 (a), the lever solenoid 38f is turned on when a prescribed number (three in the case of this modification) of game balls has won the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the round. It becomes possible to start operation by entering a state.
As described above, in this modified example, in addition to the big prize counter (large prize mouth count number area), a dedicated counter (that is, the prescribed number counter (specified number count number area)) for counting the prescribed number is provided. Provided. That is, a counter for determining whether a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls has won in the lower major winning opening, and a determination of whether a prescribed number (for example, three) of gaming balls has been won in the lower major winning opening. This makes it easy to make each determination.

In this modified example, the specified number is counted by counting down, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number can be counted by counting up.
It is also possible to configure so as not to provide a dedicated counter for counting the specified number (that is, the specified number counter (specified number count number area)). In the case of such a configuration, for example, instead of the processing of steps A213 and A214, processing for determining whether or not the number of winning prize counts has reached a specified value (“3” in the case of this modification) is performed. Then, when the number of winning prizes count is not a specified value, the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of winning prizes reaches a specified value, the lever solenoid control timer area is set to 0. By clearing (Step A215) and ending the lower large prize opening switch monitoring process, a prescribed number (three in the case of this modification) of game balls has won the first special variable prize winning device 38 from the start of the round. At this time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on and the operation can be started.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
The lever solenoid control process of this modification is the same as the lever solenoid control process (see FIG. 129) of Modification 6-1.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 130, the game control device 100 of the present modification executes a lever solenoid control process shown in FIG. 129 instead of the lever solenoid control process shown in FIG.

  When the lever solenoid control process sequentially updates the lever solenoid control pointer every time a predetermined time elapses and the probability change lever solenoid control table is set, as shown in FIG. When ON / OFF is set, and the validity change operation area switch 38d is enabled / disabled, on the other hand, when a normal lever solenoid control table is set, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), the lever solenoid The ON / OFF of 38f is set, and the validity / invalidity of the probability changing operation region switch 38d is set.

When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid control pointer is set to “6”, so that the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled. Become. Then, after “6” is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, “−1” is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.
In this modified example, the case where the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition is, for example, a case where the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol, and a predetermined number (in the case of this modified example) from the start of the round. This may be the case when the openable time of 25000 ms has elapsed from the start of the round before the three (3) game balls have won the first special variable winning device 38.

Here, the difference between the modified example 6-1 and the modified example is that the next step when the control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 of the lever solenoid control process is “3” or “4”. This is the value of the control timer for the next operation acquired in A1107.
Specifically, in Modification 6-1 described above, when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in Step A1106 is “3”, the lever solenoid control timer of the next operation acquired in the next Step A1107. Is a value corresponding to 9900 ms (= 10000 ms−100 ms), and when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “4”, the next acquired in the next step A1107 The value of the lever solenoid control timer for operation is “a value corresponding to 14936 ms (= 25000 ms−64 ms−10000 ms)”.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “3”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer of the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is “25000 ms. When the lever solenoid control pointer for the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “4”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer for the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is “(25000 ms. )-(Current special figure game processing timer value) ".

In this modification, when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “3”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer of the next operation acquired in next step A1107 corresponds to “25000 ms. Value ", that is, the same value as the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38, based on the fact that the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 with the -1 update of the lever solenoid control timer (step A1110). The lever solenoid control pointer is prevented from switching from “3” to “4”. That is, the lever solenoid control timer is set to 0 (the lever solenoid control timer area is set to 0 when the number of winnings to the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the round reaches the specified number (step A214; Y). The lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “3” to “4” only based on (cleared).
When the lever solenoid control pointer for the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “3”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer for the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is “a value corresponding to 25000 ms”. The value is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a value larger than “a value corresponding to 24836 ms (= 25000 ms−64 ms−100 ms)”.

  Further, in this modification, when the lever solenoid control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “4”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer of the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is “(25000 ms). )-(Current special figure game processing timer value) ", the lever solenoid control pointer is changed from" 4 "at the timing when the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. It switches to “5”. That is, based on the fact that the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 with the -1 update of the lever solenoid control timer (step A1110) (the openable time of the first special variable winning device 38 has elapsed), or round The lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (the lever solenoid control timer area has been cleared to 0) when the number of winnings in the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the game has reached a predetermined number (step A209; Y) Based on this, the lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “4” to “5”.

<Modification 6-3>
When the lower solenoid valve V is opened, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on for the second time when the specified time (for example, 10000 ms) has elapsed since the end of the first time ON, or when the first special variable winning device from the start of the round. It is not limited to the case where the number of winnings to 38 reaches a specified number (for example, 3), and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the modification 6-1 and the modification 6-2 may be combined. That is, when the lower solenoid valve V is opened, the timing at which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on for the second time is the first special variable winning device from when the specified time (for example, 10000 ms) elapses from the end of the first ON state or the round starts. It may be when the lever solenoid ON condition is satisfied, that is, whether the number of winnings to 38 reaches a specified number (for example, 3).

  FIG. 133 shows details of the open mode. The details of the upper long opening, the upper short opening, the lower long opening, and the opening of the lower short opening that is not in the specific round are the same as those in the above embodiment (see FIG. 8), and are therefore omitted.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), in the lower V release of this modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t201). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t202). When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t203).
In addition, a specified time (10000 ms in the case of this modification) elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, or a specified number (three in the case of this modification) of game balls from the start of the round If any lever solenoid ON condition for winning the device 38 is satisfied, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is activated (t204).

  When either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Then, the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t205). Furthermore, if either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation. To do. When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t206).

Further, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), in the lower short opening that is the specific round of the present modification, the first special variable winning device 38 is released with the start of the round (t211). Further, as the round starts, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability change operation region switch 38d is made effective.
The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms elapses from the start of the round (t212). When the remaining ball monitoring time of 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled (t213).

When either 25000 ms openable time elapses from the start of the round or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. Then, the lower ball winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t215).
Here, in the case of the lower short opening which is the specific round, the lever solenoid 38f is not turned on and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is not effective regardless of which lever solenoid ON condition is satisfied (t214).

That is, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), when the lower V is opened in this modification, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on twice. Since the second ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability changing operation region 38h. Therefore, when the big hit type is probable, the high probability state is almost certainly obtained.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the lever solenoid 38f is turned on only once in the lower short opening that is the specific round of this modification. And since this one ON state is a short time, possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h is low. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the big hit type is normal (non-probable variation).

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
The process during the fanfare / interval of the present modification is the same as the process during the fanfare / interval of the modification 6-2 (see FIG. 131).
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 133, the game control apparatus 100 of the present modification executes the fanfare / inter-interval process shown in FIG. 131 instead of the fanfare / interval process shown in FIG.

[Shimodai prize exit switch monitoring process]
The lower prize winning port switch monitoring process of the present modification is the same as the lower prize winning port switch monitoring process (see FIG. 132) of Modification 6-2.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 133, the game control apparatus 100 of the present modified example replaces the lower prize port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. 36 with the lower prize port switch monitoring process shown in FIG. Execute.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
The lever solenoid control process of this modification is the same as the lever solenoid control process (see FIG. 129) of Modification 6-1.
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 133, the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the lever solenoid control process shown in FIG. 129 instead of the lever solenoid control process shown in FIG.

  When the lever solenoid control processing sequentially updates the lever solenoid control pointer every time a predetermined time elapses and a lever solenoid control table for probability change is set, as shown in FIG. When ON / OFF is set and the probability change operation region switch 38d is enabled / disabled, on the other hand, when a normal lever solenoid control table is set, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the lever solenoid The ON / OFF of 38f is set, and the validity / invalidity of the probability changing operation region switch 38d is set.

  When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid control pointer is set to “6”, so that the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the probability variation operation region switch 38d is disabled. Become. Then, after “6” is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, “−1” is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the operation is stopped.

Here, in this modification, when the control pointer of the next operation acquired in step A1106 of the lever solenoid control process is “3” or “4”, the control timer of the next operation acquired in the next step A1107. The value of is the same as that of the modified example 6-1.
Specifically, in this modification, when the lever solenoid control pointer for the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “3”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer for the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is “Value corresponding to 9900 ms (= 10000 ms−100 ms)”. Thereby, based on the establishment of the condition that the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (the condition that the specified time has elapsed) with the -1 update of the lever solenoid control timer (step A1110), or from the start of the round With the condition that the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (the lever solenoid control timer area has been cleared to 0) when the number of winnings in the first special variable winning device 38 has reached the specified number (step A214; Y). The lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “3” to “4” based on the establishment, that is, based on the previously established lever solenoid ON condition.

  In this modification, when the lever solenoid control pointer for the next operation acquired in step A1106 is “4”, the value of the lever solenoid control timer for the next operation acquired in next step A1107 is “14936 ms ( = Value corresponding to 25000 ms−64 ms−10000 ms ”. Thereby, the lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “4” to “5” at the timing when the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished. That is, based on the establishment of the condition that the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 with the -1 update of the lever solenoid control timer (step A1110) (the condition that the openable time of the first special variable winning device 38 has elapsed). Alternatively, the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (the lever solenoid control timer area is in accordance with the fact that the number of winnings to the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the round has reached a predetermined number (step A209; Y). The lever solenoid control pointer is switched from “4” to “5” based on the satisfaction of the condition “0 cleared”, that is, based on the previously established condition.

  As described above, in the gaming machines 10 of the modified example 6-1, the modified example 6-2, and the modified example 6-3, the result of the variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays the plurality of identification information in a variable manner is a special result. In the case of a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value in the case of becoming a game, it can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special gaming state and an open state in which the game ball can win A special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) having a specific region (probability changing operation region 38h) into which a game ball can flow inside, and a specific region in a specific round among a plurality of rounds in a special gaming state A movable member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into an off state in which a game ball cannot flow into and an on state in which a game ball can flow into the specific area, and a probability state in which a special result occurs, is a normal probability state (low probability) State) and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, the probability control means (game control device 100) set to either, and whether or not the game ball that has won the special variable winning device has flowed into the specific area Determination means (game control device 100) for determination. Then, if the determination means does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special game state to the normal probability state, and also determines the game ball by the determination means. Is determined to have entered the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the high probability state. In addition, the special results include a first big hit (in the case of this modification, a normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal)) and a second big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit (in the case of this modification, a probable variable big hit). (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation)), and the conversion mode of the special variation winning device in the specific round is the same in the case where the result of the variation display game is the first big hit and the second big hit. Yes, the conversion mode of the movable member is different depending on whether the result of the variable display game is the first big hit or the second big hit.

  When the first special variation winning device 38 based on the probability variation jackpot is opened (lower V opening), the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h, and the first special variation winning device 38 based on the normal jackpot (the specific round) In order to differentiate the possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h in the lower short circuit release), the conversion mode of the movable member is changed according to the case where the result of the variable display game is a normal big hit and the probability big hit. In the same manner, the conversion mode of the special variable winning device in a specific round may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display game is a normal jackpot or a probability variable jackpot. In that case, there is a difference in the opening time of the special variable prize winning device in a specific round between the case where the result of the variable display game is a normal big hit and the case where the positive change is a big hit (the normal big hit is more than the case where it is a positive big hit). In some cases, the opening time of the special variable winning device in a specific round is shorter. Therefore, there is a difference in the number of balls that can be obtained in the special game state depending on the type of the big hit (usually a big hit than in the case of a promising big hit) In the case of, there were cases where the number of balls that were obtained in the special gaming state was smaller).

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the first special fluctuation winning device 38 based on the probability variation jackpot is opened (lower V opening), the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h and the first special variation based on the normal jackpot. In order to change the possibility that a game ball flows into the probability changing operation area 38h when the winning device 38 is released (lower short opening which is the specific round), the conversion mode of the special variable winning device in the specific round is changed to a variable display game. The result of the above is the same for the case of the normal big hit and the case of the probability variable big hit, and the conversion mode of the movable member is different depending on whether the result of the variable display game is the normal big hit or the case of the probability variable big hit. .
Therefore, there is no difference in the opening time of the special variable winning device in a specific round between the case where the result of the variable display game is a normal jackpot and the case where the probability is a big jackpot. That is, even with the big hit, it is possible to obtain the same number of balls as the probability variation big hit).

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 6-1, the movable member (lever member 38i) has a first big hit (in the case of this modified example, the normal big hit (5R normal) 4R (normal))), the ON state is maintained until the first specific time (64 ms in the case of the present modification) elapses after the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is opened. Thus, when the result of the variable display game is the second big hit (in the case of this modification, the probability variation big hit (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation)), the first specific time after the special variation winning device is opened. Until the time elapses, and can be turned on again when a second specific time (specified time; 10000 ms in the case of this modification) elapses after the on state ends. Yes (Fig. 127 a), (b) reference).

  Therefore, the first special variable based on the second big hit is more likely than the possibility of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h when the first special variable winning device 38 based on the first big hit is opened (lower short opening that is the specific round). It is possible to increase the possibility of game balls flowing into the probability variation operating area 38h when the variable prize winning device 38 is opened (lower V opening), and it is possible to obtain the same number of outgoing balls regardless of the type of jackpot It is.

  Further, in the gaming machines 10 of the modified example 6-1, the modified example 6-2, and the modified example 6-3, the determination means (game control device 100) is the result of the variation display game (special view variation display game). In the case of one big hit (in the case of this modification, normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal)), the first specific time (64 ms in the case of this modification) and after the first specific time ends The determination is possible until the effective time (the first remaining ball monitoring time, 100 ms in this modification) elapses, and the result of the variable display game is the second big hit (in the case of this modification, the probability change big hit ( 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation)), the determination can be made during the first specific time and until the first effective time elapses after the first specific time ends. 2 specific time (specified time. In the case of this modification, 10 (00 ms), and during the ON state and until the second effective time (second remaining ball monitoring time, 100 ms in this modification) elapses after the ON state ends. It can be configured to be

With this configuration, it is possible to reliably determine the inflow of game balls to the specific area.
In this modification, the first effective time (first remaining ball monitoring time) and the second effective time (second remaining ball monitoring time) are counted by the same timer (lever solenoid control timer). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the lever solenoid control timer (lever solenoid control timer area), a dedicated timer for counting the second valid time (that is, the second valid time control timer (second valid time control timer) It is also possible to provide a time control timer area)).

  In addition, in the gaming machines 10 of the modified example 6-1, the modified example 6-2, and the modified example 6-3, the result of the variable display game (special map variable display game) that displays the plurality of identification information in a variable manner is the special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when it becomes, it can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special gaming state and an open state in which the game ball can win, A special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) having a specific region (probability changing operation region 38h) into which a game ball can flow inside, and a game in a specific region among a plurality of rounds in a special gaming state A movable member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into an off state in which a ball cannot flow into and an on state in which a game ball can flow into the specific area, and a probability state in which a special result occurs is a normal probability state (low probability state). And a probability control means (game control device 100) that is set to any one of a high probability state higher than the normal probability state and whether or not a game ball that has won a special variable winning device flows into a specific area Determination means (game control device 100). Then, if the determination means does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special game state to the normal probability state, and also determines the game ball by the determination means. Is determined to have entered the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the high probability state. In addition, the special results include a first big hit (in the case of this modification, a normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal)) and a second big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit (in the case of this modification, a probable variable big hit). (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation)), and the conversion mode of the special variation winning device in the specific round is the same in the case where the result of the variation display game is the first big hit and the second big hit. In addition, the movable member has a longer ON period when the result of the variable display game is the second big hit than when the result of the variable display game is the first big hit.

  Therefore, there is no difference in the opening time of the special variable winning device in the specific round between the case where the result of the variable display game is the first jackpot and the case where the second jackpot is won. You can earn a number.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 6-2, the movable member (lever member 38i) has a first big hit (in the case of the present modified example, a normal big hit (5R normal) 4R (normal)), it is turned on for a specific time (64 ms in the case of the present variation), and the result of the variable display game is the second big hit (in the case of this variation, the probability variation big hit (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation) 4R probability variation)), the game is turned on for a specific time, and the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) in the specific round is a specified number (specified number, this number). It is possible to turn on again when the number reaches three in the modification (see FIGS. 130A and 130B).

  Specifically, in the case of the modified example 6-2, in the special game state, the movable member (the lever member 38i) has a first big hit (in the case of the modified example, In the case of a normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal), it will remain on until the specific time (64 ms in the case of this modification) elapses after the special variable winning device is open, When the result is the second big hit (in the case of this modification, the probability variation big hit (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation)), it turns on until the specific time elapses after the special variable winning device is opened. The number of game balls won in the special variable winning device in a specific round reaches the specified number (specified number, three in the case of this modification) until the special variable winning device is closed. Again on and Rukoto is possible.

  Therefore, the first special variable based on the second big hit is more likely than the possibility of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h when the first special variable winning device 38 based on the first big hit is opened (lower short opening that is the specific round). It is possible to increase the possibility of game balls flowing into the probability variation operating area 38h when the variable prize winning device 38 is opened (lower V opening), and it is possible to obtain the same number of outgoing balls regardless of the type of jackpot It is.

Note that the number of times the first special variable winning device 38 is in the open state in the special gaming state is not limited to one, and the conversion mode of the first special variable winning device 38 in the specific round is the first big hit and the first. If it is the same for the case of two big hits, the number of times that the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the special gaming state may be plural.
In addition, when the number of times that the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the special game state is a plurality of times, the movable member (lever member 38i) has the first big hit as the result of the variable display game. When the first special variable winning device 38 is in an open state until a specific time (64 ms in the case of this modification) elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is turned on, and the result of the variable display game is the second big hit, The number of times (the number of times since the start of the round) that the first special variable prize-winning device 38 is in the open state is on during the period from when the special variable prize-winning device 38 is in the open state until a specific time has elapsed. It is also possible to configure so that the first special variation winning device 38 is turned on again after the specified number of times is reached until the first special variation winning device 38 is finally closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the modified example 6-3 has a special value that gives a player a game value when a result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a gaming state, in a special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and a specific area in which the game ball can flow in (probable change operation) A special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) having a region 38h), an off state in which a game ball cannot flow into a specific region in a specific round among a plurality of rounds in the special game state, and a game in the specific region A movable member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into an ON state in which a sphere can flow in, and a probability state in which a special result occurs are a normal probability state (low probability state) and a higher value than the normal probability state. A probability control means (game control device 100) for setting to any of the rate states, a determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a game ball that has won a special variation winning device has flowed into a specific area, It has. Then, if the determination means does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special game state to the normal probability state, and also determines the game ball by the determination means. Is determined to have entered the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the high probability state. In addition, the special results include a first big hit (in the case of this modification, a normal big hit (5R normal, 4R normal)) and a second big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit (in the case of this modification, a probable variable big hit). (12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation)), and the conversion mode of the special variation winning device in the specific round is the same in the case where the result of the variation display game is the first big hit and the second big hit. is there. Further, when the result of the variable display game is the first big hit, the movable member is turned on for the first specific time (64 ms in the case of the present modification), and the result of the variable display game is the second big hit. During the first specific time, the on state is turned on, and the second specific time (specified time; 10000 ms in the case of this modification) has elapsed since the end of the on state. When the number of game balls won reaches a specified number (a specified number, 3 in the case of this modification) or any of the conditions (lever solenoid ON condition) is satisfied, it can be turned on again. (See FIGS. 133 (a) and (b)).

  Therefore, the first special variable based on the second big hit is more likely than the possibility of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h when the first special variable winning device 38 based on the first big hit is opened (lower short opening that is the specific round). It is possible to increase the possibility of game balls flowing into the probability variation operating area 38h when the variable prize winning device 38 is opened (lower V opening), and it is possible to obtain the same number of outgoing balls regardless of the type of jackpot It is.

In the modified example 6, the conversion mode of the movable member (lever member 38i) is different depending on whether the result of the variable display game is the first big hit or the second big hit, that is, according to the type of the big hit. Although the variation mode of the movable member is configured to be different, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the variation mode of the movable member to be different according to conditions other than the type of jackpot. Further, for example, in the case of the first big hit (usually big hit), the movable member (lever member 38i) may not be operated.
In the modified example 6, the condition that the specified time elapses from the end of the first ON state, and the condition that the number of winnings to the first special variable winning device 38 from the start of the specific round reaches the specified number, Although the lever solenoid ON condition is used, the present invention is not limited to this, and other conditions may be used as the lever solenoid ON condition.

  The position of the specific round (lever solenoid operation round) of the plurality of rounds in the specific gaming state, that is, what number round, depending on whether the result of the variable display game is the first big hit or the second big hit. The specific round may be different.

Further, a specific round (lever solenoid operation round) may be provided a plurality of times in one specific gaming state.
Further, the number of specific rounds (lever solenoid operation rounds) provided in one special game state may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display game is the first big hit or the second big hit. Specifically, for example, in the case of the second big hit (probability big hit) than in the case of the first big hit (usually big hit), even if the number of specific rounds provided in one special game state is increased. Good.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135.
Note that the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 134, a ball storage effect device 90 is provided on the left part of the center case 40, and a general prize is placed on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. A mouth 35 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 134 and FIG. 135, the ball storage effect device 90 includes a flow path member 91 that forms a flow path 91a through which game balls can flow in a row, a slide member 92 provided in the middle of the flow path 91a, and The swing member 93 and an out port 94 provided downstream of the flow path 91a are provided.
The game ball that has flowed into the ball storage effect device 90 provided in the center case 40 passes through the flow path 91 a formed by the flow path member 91 and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10. In this process, the game ball is stored in the upstream portion of the flow path 91a by the slide member 92, and acts on the swing member 93 to swing it. The production accompanying the inflow of the sphere can be executed. That is, the ball storage effect device 90 can perform an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the ball storage effect device 90, and specifically, an effect using the slide member 92 and the swing member 93 is possible. is there.

The flow path 91 a is bent in accordance with the outer shape of the center case 40. The upstream end of the flow path 91a is open and serves as a ball inflow port 91b through which game balls flowing down the game area 32 can flow. On the other hand, the downstream end of the flow path 91a is closed, and all the game balls that flow into the flow path 91a (that is, game balls that flow into the ball storage effect device 90) are all outside the gaming machine 10 through the out port 94. To be discharged.
In addition, although the flow path member 91 of this embodiment is a bowl-shaped member opened to the front, the flow path member 91 is configured so that a game ball passing through the flow path 91a is visible from the front. That's fine. Specifically, the flow path member 91 may be, for example, a cylindrical member having optical transparency (that is, a transparent or translucent cylindrical member).

  The slide member 92 is disposed on the upstream side of the bent portion of the flow path 91a. The slide member 92 protrudes forward and stores the game ball that has flowed into the flow path 91a in the upstream portion of the flow path 91a (that is, prevents the game ball from moving toward the out port 94), and the rear The game ball that has retreated to flow into the flow path 91a can be converted to a retreat state in which the game ball is not stored in the upstream portion of the flow path 91a (that is, the game ball is not prevented from moving toward the out port 94). . Here, the white slide member 92 (see FIGS. 135 (a) and (c)) without hatching in the figure corresponds to the projecting slide member 92, and the slide with polka dot hatching in the figure. The member 92 (see FIG. 135 (b)) corresponds to the slide member 92 in the retracted state.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the effect button 25 is detected, the effect control device 300 controls the drive source of the slide member 92 to cause the slide member 92 to slide (projected state). From the retracted state to the protruding state after elapse of a predetermined time). That is, the sliding member 92 slides in response to a predetermined operation on the effect button 25, and the storage of game balls in the upstream portion of the flow path 91a is released. Thereby, the inflow of the game ball to the ball storage effect device 90 can be effected by the operation of the slide member 92.
Note that the slide operation of the slide member 92 is not limited to the operation of converting from the projecting state to the retracted state when a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 is detected and returning from the retracted state to the projecting state after a predetermined time has elapsed. Absent. The slide operation of the slide member 92 is, for example, converted from a protruding state to a retracted state when a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 is detected, and maintained in the retracted state while the predetermined operation is detected. The operation may return from the retracted state to the projecting state when no longer detected.

In addition, an operation unit is provided separately from the operation unit 24 and the effect button 25, and when a predetermined operation on the operation unit is detected, the effect control device 300 controls the drive source of the slide member 92, and the slide member It is also possible to configure so that 92 is slid.
In the present embodiment, the drive source of the slide member 92 is controlled by the effect control device 300. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive control source of the slide member 92 is controlled by the game control device 100. It is also possible to do. In this case, for example, when the operation unit 24 is provided separately from the operation unit 24 and the effect button 25 and the detection signal of the switch for detecting a predetermined operation on the operation unit is input to the input unit 120, the game control device 100 Then, the drive source of the slide member 92 is controlled to slide the slide member 92.

A swing member 93 that produces an effect by swinging by the action of a game ball (hereinafter referred to as “inner sphere”) that flows down along the flow path 91 a in the flow path 91 a is rotated on the flow path member 91. A support portion 91c is provided to support it. The support portion 91 c is the swing center of the swing member 93 and is formed to extend forward from the bottom wall (rear wall) of the flow path member 91.
In addition, an opening 91 d that opens toward the game area 32 is provided between the bent portion of the flow path 91 a and the out port 94 in the left side wall (side wall on the game area 32) of the flow path member 91. Yes.

  The swing member 93 is a triangular member disposed downstream of the bent portion of the flow path 91a and upstream of the out port 94. The swinging member 93 swings around the support portion 91c, so that the swinging member 93 is entirely accommodated in the flow path 91a and blocks the flow path 91a (a state shown in FIG. 135 (a)), and a part thereof It can be converted into an open state (state shown in FIG. 135 (c)) that jumps out of the channel 91a from the opening 91d and does not block the channel 91a.

In the opened state, the swinging member 93 flows in a region between the general winning opening 35 provided on the left side of the ball storage effect device 90 and the flow path member 91, for example, as shown in FIG. The traveling direction of a game ball (hereinafter referred to as “external ball”) traveling (flowing down) along the path 91a can be changed. On the other hand, in the disconnected state, for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), the traveling direction of the external sphere cannot be changed.
Further, the swinging member 93 has a flow path in any of the “disconnected state”, “open state”, and “state between the disconnected state and the open state (the state shown in FIG. 135 (b))”. The game ball is prevented from coming and going through the opening 91d of the member 91. That is, the swing member 93 prevents the game ball on the game area 32 (outside the flow channel 91a) from flowing into the flow channel 91a through the opening 91d regardless of the state of the swing member 93. The game ball in the channel 91a can be prevented from flowing out onto the game area 32 (outside the channel 91a) through the opening 91d. Thereby, the game ball can flow into the flow path 91a only from the ball inflow port 91b, and can flow out of the flow path 91a only from the out port 94.

The swing member 93 is not operated by a driving source such as a motor, but is operated by an internal sphere colliding.
The position of the center of gravity of the swing member 93 is set to a position that maintains the disconnected state. Then, when the internal sphere collides with the rocking member 93 in the non-passing state, a force directed in the direction of jumping out from the opening 91d (clockwise direction in the example shown in FIG. 135) is applied to the rocking member 93. In response to this, the swing member 93 swings (rotates) around the support portion 91c to convert from the non-open state to the open state. Thereby, the inflow of the game ball to the ball storage effect device 90 can be effected by the operation of the swing member 93.

Further, the swinging member 93 is provided with a stopper 93a, and when the swinging member 93 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of protruding from the opening 91d (that is, the swinging member 93 reaches the open state). For example, as shown in FIG. 135 (c), the stopper 93a abuts against the left side wall of the flow path member 91 and restricts further rotation (rotation in a direction protruding from the opening 91d). Yes. When the swinging member 93 reaches the open state, the swinging member 93 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise direction in the example shown in FIG. 135) by its own weight, thereby converting the open state to the non-open state. Yes. That is, the swinging member 93 is set to a position where the center of gravity position is maintained in the disconnected state. Therefore, the swinging member 93 is not maintained in the opened state and returns to the disconnected state after the game ball passes.
As described above, in the ball storage effect device 90, when the internal sphere collides with the swing member 93, the swing member 93 swings (converts from the non-open state to the open state, and returns from the open state to the non-open state. The traveling direction of the external sphere can be changed.

  In the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 provided on the left side of the ball storage effect device 90, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged as shown in FIG. In the plurality of obstacle nails, only the external ball whose traveling direction is changed by the swing member 93 during the swing operation (that is, the external ball that collides with the swing member 93 during the swing operation) is the general winning award 35. It is placed in a place where you can win. That is, the ball storage effect device 90 collides with the swing member 93 while the internal sphere stored in the upstream portion of the flow path 91 a is falling toward the out port 94, and the swing member 93. The movement of the external sphere on the game area 32 (outside the flow path 91a) is affected by swinging the sphere, so that the external sphere is difficult to win a ball detection area such as a winning opening or a gate (in the present embodiment). In this case, it has a function that affects the result of the gaming machine 10, such as winning a prize to the general winning opening 35) provided on the left side of the ball storage effect device 90.

  It should be noted that in this embodiment, a ball detection in which only the external sphere whose traveling direction has been changed by the rocking member 93 during the rocking motion is provided in the vicinity of the ball storage effect device 90 by arranging the obstacle nail at an appropriate position. Although it was configured to be able to flow into the region (in the case of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 35), it is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, by arranging a member other than the obstacle nail (for example, a windmill, a wall-like member, etc.) at an appropriate place, only the external sphere whose traveling direction is changed by the swing member 93 during the swing operation It is also possible to configure to be able to flow into a sphere detection area provided in the vicinity of the sphere storage effect device 90.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the ball storage effect device 90, so that the player's attention can be easily gathered by the slide operation by the slide member 92 and the swing operation by the swing member 93. It is possible to enhance the production effect for the inflow of game balls to the device 90.
Further, as a result of the slide member 92 sliding in response to a predetermined operation on the effect button 25 by the player, the swing member 93 swings. Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can slide the slide member 92 at a timing desired by the player, and a game ball (ball) stored in the upstream portion of the flow path 91a by the slide operation. The game balls temporarily held in the storage effect device 90 can be dropped, and the swing member 93 can be swung by the drop. If the timing is good, the external ball collides with the swinging member 93 during the swinging operation, and a ball detection area provided in the vicinity of the ball storage effecting device 90 (in the case of the present embodiment, a general prize opening). 35). That is, if the timing is good, the swinging member 93 can guide the external sphere to the ball detection area, so that the game ball that has flowed into the sphere storage effect device 90 can provide a novel effect that has not existed before. , Can effectively enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the skill of the player is reflected in whether or not the game ball can be guided to the ball detection area by the swing member 93, a sense of superiority is given to the player who is playing the game repeatedly on the gaming machine 10. And the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in a gaming machine having a gaming board 30 having a gaming area 32 formed on the surface, a ball inflow portion (ball flow) through which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 can flow is provided. An inlet 91b), a ball channel portion (flow channel 91a) for flowing down the inflow sphere flowing into the ball inflow portion, and a storage state (protruding state) and a game that are provided inside the ball channel portion and store game balls A sphere storage portion (slide member 92) that can be converted into a non-storage state (retracted state) that does not store a sphere, and a sphere passage portion that is provided downstream of the sphere storage portion within the sphere passage portion. A movable member (oscillating member 93) that can be converted into a predetermined state (open state) by collision of a game ball that passes through the ball, and a ball detection that is provided outside the ball channel portion and that can detect the game ball that has passed through Area (general winning opening 35), and the movable member is in a predetermined state, Game ball flowing down the outside of the flow path portion (external sphere) is inducible to sphere detection region.

Therefore, in addition to the storage of the game ball by the ball storage unit and the operation of the movable member based on the release of the storage, it is possible to guide the game ball to the ball detection area in relation to the operation of the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect during the operation of the movable member.
Here, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment further includes an out area (out port 94) through which a game ball that does not win a winning area can flow, and the ball flow path section (flow path 91a) has a ball inflow section ( The inflow sphere that has flowed into the sphere inflow port 91b) flows down to the out region, and the movable member (swing member 93) is located downstream of the sphere storage unit (slide member 92) and out of the inside of the sphere channel unit. It is provided upstream from the region.

It should be noted that the ball detection area is not limited to the general winning opening 35, but is an area other than the general winning opening 35 among the areas monitored by the game control device 100 (for example, a normal symbol starting gate (normal figure starting gate) 34). , Starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize opening), ordinary variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize winning mouth), first special variable winning prize device (lower university winning prize opening) 38, second special variable winning prize apparatus (upper prize winning prize) Mouth) 39, probability variation operating region 38h). Further, the ball detection area may be an area monitored by the effect control apparatus 300 instead of an area monitored by the game control apparatus 100. That is, when the game ball passes through the ball detection area, the effect control device 300 executes a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that changes the mode, an effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display, and a notice effect). May be.
Further, the ball storage portion is not limited to the slide member 92 that can be converted into the protruding state and the retracted state, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the movable member is not limited to the swinging member 93 that can be converted between the non-open state and the open state, and can be appropriately changed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment includes an effect operation unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and the ball storage unit (slide member 92) corresponds to the operation of the effect operation unit. It is possible to convert the storage state (protruding state) to the non-reserving state (retracted state).
By configuring in this manner, the movable member can be converted into a predetermined state at a player's desired timing, so that it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect during the operation of the movable member.
The production operation unit is not limited to the production button 25 and can be changed as appropriate.

<Modification Example 1 of Second Embodiment>
Next, Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
For example, as illustrated in FIG. 136, the ball storage effect device 90 includes a game area 32 between a slide member 92 and a bent portion of the flow path 91 a on the left side wall (side wall on the game area 32 side) of the flow path member 91. There may be provided a second ball inflow port 91e into which a game ball flowing down can flow.
By providing the second ball inlet 91e, the swing member 93 swings when a game ball entering the flow path 91a from the ball inlet 91b collides with the second ball inlet 91e. When the game ball that has entered the flow path 91a collides with each other, it swings. That is, the swing member 93 can be converted not only to the open state at a timing desired by the player, but also to the open state at an unexpected timing of the player. And if the timing is good, since the external sphere can be guided to the sphere detection area by the swing member 93, the game ball that has flowed into the sphere storage effect device 90 can provide an unprecedented effect. , Can effectively enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the skill of the player is reflected in whether or not the game ball can be guided to the ball detection area by the swing member 93, a sense of superiority is given to the player who is playing the game repeatedly on the gaming machine 10. And the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present modified example is a gaming machine including the gaming board 30 having the gaming area 32 formed on the surface thereof, and a ball inflow portion (ball inlet) through which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 can flow. 91b, the second sphere inflow port 91e), a sphere channel part (channel 91a) for flowing down the inflow sphere flowing into the sphere inflow part, and the sphere channel part provided in the sphere channel part. A movable member (oscillating member 93) that can be converted into a predetermined state (open state) when a passing game ball collides, and a ball detection region that is provided outside the ball flow path portion and can detect a passed game ball When the movable member is in a predetermined state, it is possible to guide the game ball (external ball) flowing down the outside of the ball channel portion to the ball detection area.

Therefore, in addition to the operation of the movable member, it is possible to guide the game ball to the ball detection area in relation to the operation of the movable member, so that it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect during the operation of the movable member. Can do.
Here, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example is further provided in an out area (out port 94) through which a game ball that does not win a winning area can flow and a ball channel section (channel 91a). A ball storage portion (slide member 92) that can be converted into a storage state (protruding state) for storing a ball and a non-storage state (retracted state) that does not store a game ball, and the first ball inflow as a ball inflow portion Part (sphere inlet 91b) and a second sphere inlet (second sphere inlet 91e) provided on the downstream side of the first sphere inlet, The inflow sphere that has flowed into the section flows down to the out region, and the sphere storage section is provided between the first sphere inflow section and the second sphere inflow section in the sphere flow path section, and is movable. The member 93) is provided between the second sphere inflow portion and the out region in the sphere flow path portion.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification includes a ball storage unit (sliding member 92) that can be converted into a storage state (a protruding state) that stores game balls and a non-storage state (a retreat state) that does not store game balls, An effect operation unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and provided as a ball inflow portion on the downstream side of the first ball inflow portion (ball inflow port 91b) and the first ball inflow portion. A second sphere inflow portion (second sphere inflow port 91e), and the movable member (swing member 93) is downstream of the sphere storage portion in the sphere flow passage portion (flow passage 91a). The sphere storage part is provided between the first sphere inflow part and the second sphere inflow part in the interior of the sphere flow path part, and is stored according to the operation of the effect operation part. It can be configured to convert from a non-reserved state.
With this configuration, the movable member can be converted into a predetermined state at a player's desired timing, and the movable member can be converted into a predetermined state at an unexpected timing of the player. It is possible to effectively improve the production effect during the operation.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
Next, Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 137, the ball storage effect device 90 may be provided in the right part of the center case 40.
In the example shown in FIG. 137, the second ball inlet 91e (see FIG. 136) is not provided in the ball storage effect device 90, but the second ball inlet 91e is provided in the ball storage effect device 90. It may be.
In the example shown in FIG. 137, when the movable member (swinging member 93) is in a predetermined state (opened state), the game ball flowing down outside the ball channel portion (channel 91a) is usually subjected to a variable swing prize. It can be guided to the device 37 (second start winning opening). In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 137, the ball detection area is the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning opening), but the ball detection area is not limited to this.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
Next, Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 138, the ball storage effect device 90 may be provided on both the left part of the center case 40 and the right part of the center case 40.
In the example shown in FIG. 138, neither the left sphere storage effect device 90 nor the right sphere storage effect device 90 is provided with the second sphere inflow port 91e (see FIG. 136). At least one of the device 90 and the right sphere storage effect device 90 may be provided with a second sphere inflow port 91e.

  In the example shown in FIG. 138, the movable member (swing member 93) of the left-side sphere storage effect device 90 is outside the sphere channel portion (channel 91 a) when it is in a predetermined state (open state). Can be guided to the general winning opening 35, and the movable member (swing member 93) of the right-side ball storage effect device 90 is in a predetermined state (open state). The game ball flowing down the outside of the section (flow path 91a) can be guided to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning port). In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 138, the ball detection areas are the general winning opening 35 and the normal variation winning apparatus 37 (second start winning opening), but the ball detection area is not limited to this.

<Modification 4 of the second embodiment>
Next, Modification 4 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141.
For example, as shown in FIG. 139, the ball storage effect device 90 may be arranged in the game area 32 separately from the center case 40.
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 139 and 141, the center case 40 includes guide channel members 450 and 460 that form guide channels for guiding game balls in the center case 40, and the center case 40. Rolling portions 470, 480, 490, etc. for rolling the game ball guided by the above may be provided.

In the gaming machine 10 of this modification, the configuration around the window portion 10a in which the display device 41 is arranged behind the center case 40 is configured as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 141, the center portion of the center case 40 is a concave chamber 401 that is open on the front side and recessed rearward. A window portion 10a is formed in the innermost portion of the concave chamber 401, and the rear thereof. A display device 41 is arranged. The left side surface portion 432 of the center case 40 receives a game ball flowing down the adjacent game area 32 and guides it into the center case 40 (a channel formed by the first guide channel member 450). The first inlet 451 and the second inlet 461 of the second guiding channel (the channel formed by the second guiding channel member 460) are provided. In the center case 40, the first rolling part 470, the second rolling part are used as rolling parts for rolling the game ball guided in the center case 40 by the first guiding channel and the second guiding channel. A moving part 480 and a third rolling part 490 are provided.

The first guide channel member 450 is a cylindrical member that forms a first guide channel through which a game ball can flow, and includes a first inlet 451 that forms an inlet on the left side surface portion 432 of the center case 40. From here, it extends rearward along the left side surface portion 432, and further extends along the upper and right sides of the display device 41 facing the window portion 10a.
The downstream end 452 of the first guide channel member 450 is on the right end side of the display device 41 facing the window 10a, and the downstream end 452 has a plate-like first rolling portion extending in the left-right direction. The left end of 470 is connected.
In addition, in the vicinity of the first inlet 451 in the first guide channel member 450, in order to detect a game ball that has flowed into the first guide channel (a channel formed by the first guide channel member 450). The first inflow detection means 453 is provided. A game ball detection signal from the first inflow detection means 453 is input to the effect control device 300.

  The first rolling part 470 is an inclined surface whose upper surface is lowered leftward and forward. In addition, a blocking wall 471 for preventing the rolling game ball from flowing down to the right is erected substantially vertically at the right end of the first rolling section 470. Most of the game balls that have flowed into the first rolling part 470 flow downward from the left end of the first rolling part 470, collide with the blocking wall 471, and flow forward.

The second guide channel member 460 is a cylindrical member that forms a second guide channel through which a game ball can flow, and includes a second inlet 461 that forms an inlet on the left side surface 432 of the center case 40. From here, it is formed so as to extend rearward along the left side surface portion 432.
The downstream end 462 of the second guide channel member 460 is on the left end side of the display device 41 facing the window portion 10a, and the guide path 464 to the second rolling unit 480 is connected to the downstream end 462. ing.
Further, in the vicinity of the second inlet 461 in the second guide channel member 460, in order to detect a game ball that has flowed into the second guide channel (a channel formed by the second guide channel member 460). The second inflow detection means 463 is provided. A game ball detection signal from the second inflow detection means 463 is input to the effect control device 300.

The second rolling part 480 is provided in the third rolling part 490 that is the bottom surface of the concave chamber 401 so as to be positioned below the first rolling part 470. In addition, the distance between each rolling part is wider than the diameter of the game ball.
The second rolling part 480 has a circular dish shape, and is called a so-called croon. The upper surface is an inclined surface that goes down toward the center, and a game ball is placed in the lower part of the third rolling part. A communication hole 481 that flows down to 490 is formed. The game ball that has flowed into the second rolling part 480 via the guide path 464 gradually flows down to the center while circling, and then flows down from the communication hole 481 to the third rolling part 490. In addition, at the center of the second rolling part 480, a guiding part 482 for guiding the game ball flowing down from the first rolling part 470 forward is formed.

  The third rolling part 490 is a part forming the bottom surface of the concave chamber 401 and is a surface inclined forward, so that the inflowing game balls flow down to the game area 32 below the center case 40. It has become.

By having such a configuration, the game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling part 470 to the guiding part 482 of the second rolling part 480 bounces upward due to the inclination of the guiding part 482 and the second rolling part 480. It flows directly into the start winning opening 36.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 141, the game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling part 470 to the guiding part 482 of the second rolling part 480 is positioned in front of the guiding part 482 in the second rolling part 480. When the two hit the ball, the two game balls directly flow into the start winning opening 36 and a continuous winning is generated. In this way, the rolling mode of the game ball becomes diverse, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  And in the production | presentation control apparatus 300, when possibility that a continuous winning will generate | occur | produce with the game ball which flows down from a rolling part is high, predetermined alerting | reporting will be performed. Specifically, the production control device 300 determines whether the input timing of the detection signals from the first inflow detection means 453 and the second inflow detection means 463 is likely to cause a continuous winning. And when the input timing of the detection signals from the first inflow detection means 453 and the second inflow detection means 463 is likely to cause a continuous winning, a process of notifying that it is a chance state for continuous winning. Do.

  Here, there is a possibility that a continuous winning may occur, for example, when the game ball detected by the first inflow detection means 453 flows down from the first rolling part 470 to the second rolling part 480, the second This is a case where the first inflow detection means 453 and the second inflow detection means 463 detect a game ball at a timing at which the game ball detected by the inflow detection means 463 can collide. In addition, after the detection of the game ball by the first inflow detection means 453, when the game ball is detected again by the first inflow detection means 453 within the consecutive winning validity period, or the detection of the game ball by the second inflow detection means 463 Thereafter, the game ball is detected again by the second inflow detection means 463 within the continuous winning validity period.

That is, when the production control device 300 detects the occurrence of continuous inflow in which a plurality of game balls are detected by the inflow detection means (first inflow detection means 453, second inflow detection means 463) within a predetermined time, Continuous inflow notifying means for notifying the occurrence of inflow is provided.
In addition, when the production control device 300 detects the game ball by the first inflow detection unit 453 and the second inflow detection unit 463 at a predetermined timing, the detection timing notification notifies that the predetermined timing has been reached. Make a means.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the ball storage effect device 90 is located on the left side of the center case 40 so that the swing member 93 faces the first inlet 451 of the first guide channel member 450. Is arranged. Thereby, the swinging motion of the swinging member 93 can support the inflow of the game ball into the first guiding channel (the channel formed by the first guiding channel member 450), for example, as shown in FIG. It is like that. That is, the slide member 92 can be slid at a timing desired by the player, and a game ball (game temporarily held in the ball storage effect device 90) stored in the upstream portion of the flow path 91a by the slide operation. Sphere) can be dropped, and the swinging member 93 can be swung by the dropping. And if the timing is good, a game ball will collide with the rocking | swiveling member 93 in rocking | fluctuation operation | movement, and will flow in into the 1st guide flow path where it is difficult to flow in. In other words, if the timing is good, the game ball can be guided to the ball detection area (in the case of this modification, the start winning opening 36) by the swinging member 93, so that the game ball that has flowed into the ball storage effect device 90 Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel production that has never existed before, and to effectively enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the skill of the player is reflected in whether or not the game ball can be guided to the ball detection area by the swing member 93, a sense of superiority is given to the player who is playing the game repeatedly on the gaming machine 10. And the interest of the player can be enhanced.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present modification is provided above the start winning opening 36 (or may be the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 or the like), so that the game ball can roll and the start winning opening. A rolling part (first rolling part 470, second rolling part 480) for causing the game ball to flow down toward the head and a guided flow for receiving the game ball in the game area 32 where the game ball flows down and guiding it to the rolling part A flow path (a flow path formed by the first guide flow path member 450, a flow path formed by the second guide flow path member 460) and an inflow detection means (first inflow) for detecting a game ball flowing into the guide flow path Detection means 453 and second inflow detection means 463), and the continuous winning notification means (production control device 300) detects occurrence of continuous inflow in which a plurality of game balls are detected by the inflow detection means within a predetermined time. The continuous flow to notify the occurrence of the continuous inflow And a notification means (effect control device 300).
Here, “notification of occurrence of continuous inflow” is notification by display of a specific image, notification by voice, lamp, or the like.

  Therefore, the interest when continuously flowing into the guide channel can be improved, and the interest when winning continuously can be improved. In other words, if it continuously flows into the guide channel, there is a high possibility of winning continuously from the rolling part to the start winning opening, and the interest was increased from the previous stage where consecutive winnings were generated, and winning continuously. The interest in the case can be enhanced. In addition, by notifying the continuous inflow, it is possible to give an impression that the frequency of winning the starting prize opening through the rolling portion is high, so that the player is more motivated to continue the game with the gaming machine. Yes, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the rolling part is provided below the first rolling part 470 and the first rolling part 470, and the gaming balls from the first rolling part 470 A game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling part 470 to the second rolling part 480 and collides with a gaming ball that rolls on the second rolling part 480. The two game balls can both flow down toward the start winning opening 36, and the guide channel is a first guide channel (which is guided by the first guide channel member 450) for guiding the game ball to the first rolling part 470. Formed flow path) and a second guide flow path (flow path formed by the second guide flow path member 460) for guiding the game ball to the second rolling part 480, the inflow detection means, First inflow detection means 453 for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the first guide channel, and a game ball that has flowed into the second guide channel 2 inflow detection means 463, the continuous inflow notification means (production control device 300), when the detection of the game ball by the first inflow detection means 453 and the second inflow detection means 463 is a predetermined timing, Detection timing notifying means (effect control device 300) for notifying that the predetermined timing has been reached is provided, and the detection timing notifying means detects the game ball detected by the first inflow detection means 453 as the first turn as the predetermined timing. The game by the first inflow detection means 453 and the second inflow detection means 463 at the timing when the game ball detected by the second inflow detection means 463 can collide when flowing down from the moving part 470 to the second rolling part 480. It can be configured to notify when a sphere is detected.

  By comprising in this way, the interest at the time of flowing into two guide channels at a predetermined timing can be improved, and the interest at the time of winning continuously can be improved. In other words, if it flows into the two guide channels at a predetermined timing, there is a high possibility that a continuous winning from the rolling part to the start winning opening will be made, and the interest will be enhanced from the previous stage where consecutive winnings occur. If you win a prize, you can enhance the interest. In addition, by notifying the continuous inflow, it is possible to give an impression that the frequency of winning the starting prize opening through the rolling portion is high, so that the player is more motivated to continue the game with the gaming machine. Yes, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the rolling parts (the first rolling part 470 and the second rolling part 480) are located in front of or below the variable display device (display device 41), and the first induced flow The path (the flow path formed by the first guide flow path member 450) receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 adjacent to one side of the variable display device, and the variable display device of the first rolling unit 470 A game ball is guided to the end located on the other side, and the second guiding channel (the channel formed by the second guiding channel member 460) is adjacent to one side of the variable display device. It is possible to receive the game ball flowing down 32 and guide the game ball to the end portion of the second rolling unit 480 located on one side of the variable display device.

  By comprising in this way, the display with a variable display apparatus and the rolling of the game ball in a rolling part can be seen simultaneously. Moreover, the interest at the time of flowing into the two induction channels at a predetermined timing can be improved, and the interest when winning continuously can be improved. In other words, the length of the path can be greatly different between the two guide passages, and two game balls that have flowed into the guide passage at a predetermined timing that is not at the same time collide with each other at the rolling part and enter the starting prize opening. It can be a highly interesting rolling aspect of flowing down.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present modified example is a gaming machine having a gaming board 30 having a gaming area 32 formed on the surface, and a ball inflow portion (a ball inflow port 91b) through which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 can flow. ), A ball channel portion (flow channel 91a) that causes the inflow sphere flowing into the ball inflow portion to flow down, and a storage state (protrusion state) that stores the game ball and is provided inside the ball channel portion. A sphere storage part (sliding member 92) that can be converted into a non-storage state (retracted state) that does not store, and is provided on the downstream side of the sphere storage part in the inside of the sphere channel part and passes through the sphere channel part A movable member (oscillating member 93) that can be converted to a predetermined state (opened state) by collision of the game ball to be played, and a ball detection region (external to the ball channel portion) that can detect the game ball that has passed through ( A start winning port 36), and the movable member is in a predetermined state when the ball channel portion Game balls flowing down the outside through the introduction flow path member 450, 460 and the rolling unit 470,480,490 provided in the center case 40, it can be derived to the sphere detection region.

Therefore, in addition to the storage of the game ball by the ball storage unit and the operation of the movable member based on the release of the storage, it is possible to guide the game ball to the ball detection area in relation to the operation of the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect during the operation of the movable member.
The sphere storage effect device 90 may be provided with a second sphere inflow port 91e (see FIG. 136).
Further, the ball detection area is not limited to the start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening).

In addition, the ball storage effect device 90 may be arranged such that the swing member 93 faces the second inlet 461 of the second guide channel member 460. In this case, the swinging motion of the swinging member 93 can assist the inflow of the game ball into the second guiding channel (the channel formed by the second guiding channel member 460).
In addition, two swinging members 93 are provided in the ball storage effecting device 90. For example, as shown in FIG. 142, one swinging member 93 faces the first inlet 451 of the first guide channel member 450, and The other swinging member 93 may be disposed so as to face the second inlet 461 of the second guide channel member 460. In this case, the swinging motion of one swinging member 93 can assist the inflow of the game ball into the first guiding channel (the channel formed by the first guiding channel member 450), and the other The swinging motion of the swinging member 93 can assist the inflow of the game ball into the second guiding channel (the channel formed by the second guiding channel member 460).

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.
FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example of specifications of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the probability states are “low probability & no time saving (low probability state and not time-short state)”, “high probability & time saving (high probability state and time-short state)” One of the three states “low probability & short time (low probability state and short time state)” is set. In this embodiment, “ST” means “high probability & short time”, and “short time” means “low probability & short time”. For example, “ST30” means a gaming state in which “high probability & short time” lasts for 30 special figure variable display games, and “short time 70” means “low probability & short time” 70 times. This means a gaming state that continues over the special figure variation display game.

In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot probability is 1 / 67.22 when the probability is low, and 1 / 29.09 when the probability is high. Further, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) (see Fig. 1), when a game ball wins at the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (see Fig. 2). ) Is not generated.
In addition, the real probability (for example, the probability of having a big hit with the first hit) is 1 / 67.22.
In addition, if the probability change ratio (for example, the ratio of the big hit that becomes the probability change big hit (big hit with V easy symbol). That is, the probability change rush rate) is 2% when the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 (special figure 1). When the game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 (special drawing 2), it is 100%.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of time reductions (number of times of continuous time reduction) is after the end of the special gaming state (special gaming state based on normal jackpots) based on the big hit symbol that is not the V easy symbol, and the V easy symbol. It is different after the special gaming state based on the big jackpot symbol (the special gaming state based on the probable big jackpot).
Specifically, the number of time reductions after the end of the normal jackpot, that is, after the end of the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot is 10 times (“time reduction 10”). However, the number of time reductions after the special symbol big hit during the support, that is, after the end of the special game state based on the normal big hit during the special figure short time is 70 times ("short time 70").
On the other hand, the number of time reductions after the end of the probable big hit, that is, after the end of the special gaming state based on the probable big hit is 100 times (“ST30” + “70 short hours”). However, when there is no V passing at the time of the probability variation big hit, that is, when the V winning is unsuccessful, the number of time reductions after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation big hit is 70 times (“time reduction 70”).

Here, when “ST” occurs, the ST mode is set as the effect mode, and when “time saving” occurs, the time reduction mode is set as the effect mode.
Therefore, the number of time savings when the V winning is successful is 100 times (“ST30” + “70 time savings”), and when the V winning is successful, the effect mode is set to the ST mode when the special gaming state is finished. When the number of games after the end of the special gaming state reaches 30 times, the effect mode is switched from the ST mode to the short-time mode, and when the number of games after the end of the special gaming state reaches 100 times, the effect mode is changed. Switch from short time mode to normal mode.
On the other hand, since the number of time reductions when failing in the V prize is 70 times ("time reduction 70"), when the V prize is failed, the production mode is set to the time reduction mode when the special gaming state ends, and the special mode When the number of games after the end of the gaming state reaches 70 times, the effect mode is switched from the short-time mode to the normal mode.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a V-probable number cut type. That is, when the V prize is successful, the special figure variation display game is played over a period from the end of the special gaming state until the number of games reaches a predetermined number (30 in this embodiment). This type sets the probability state to a high probability state (probability variation state).
In addition, two types of starting ports (starting winning port 36 and normal variation winning device 37) and one type of large winning port (first special variable winning device 38 (lower large winning port)) are provided.
In addition, during the big hit and in the mode (in the production mode other than the normal mode (in the case of the present embodiment, in the time reduction mode and in the ST mode)), the right strike is more advantageous than the left strike.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the upper limit of the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are both four, and the start winning opening The hold when the game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 (special figure 2) is digested with priority over the hold when the game ball wins the special prize 36 (special figure 1).
In addition, ST (30 times) draw rate, that is, the ratio of winning the big hit again during the occurrence of “ST30” is 64.99%, and the short time (70 times) draw rate, ie, when the “short time 70” occurs, The winning percentage is 64.98%, and the pull-in rate (10 times) pull-in rate, that is, the percentage of winning a big hit again during the occurrence of “shortening 10” is 13.9%.

In the present embodiment, in order to set the continuation rate (the rate of winning a big hit again) to the upper limit (here 65%) in each of the “ST” and “time saving” states, the special gaming state based on the probable big hit is terminated. Later, the number of time reductions is 100 (“ST30” + “time reduction 70”) when the V winning is successful, and 70 times (“time reduction 70”) when the V winning is unsuccessful.
In this embodiment, in order to prevent the continuation rate from exceeding the upper limit in each of the “ST” and “time saving” states, the number of time reductions is determined based on the type of jackpot and the success or failure of the V prize. doing.

When the number of time reductions is determined based only on the type of jackpot (that is, whether it is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic big hit), the continuation rate in “time saving” may exceed the upper limit. Specifically, for example, when the specification table shown in FIG. 143 is changed so that the number of time reductions after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot is 100 times regardless of whether the V winning is successful (that is, From FIG. 143, “* If the V pass was not passed at the time of a probable big hit, 70 times (short time 70)” is deleted), “ST” does not occur when the V winning is unsuccessful, so “short time 100” Will occur, and the continuation rate at “short time” will exceed the upper limit (65% in this case).
Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adding the presence / absence of the V winning success to the condition for determining the number of time reductions, the continuation rate at “time reduction” is prevented from exceeding the upper limit.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is determined based on one condition (for example, only the type of jackpot) because the number of time reductions is determined based on a plurality of conditions (the type of jackpot and the success or failure of V winning). Compared to the case, the game becomes more diverse and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the effect data (data for executing the effect), when the V winning is successful, not only “ST” but also the V winning. "Time reduction" is also generated the same number of times as in the case of failure (70 times in this embodiment).
When only “ST” is generated when the V winning is successful, it is not possible to share the effect after the special gaming state is ended when the V winning is successful and when the V winning is failed. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare the effect data used when the V winning is successful and the effect data used when the V winning is failed as the effect data used after the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot. A lot of storage capacity is required.

  In addition, when the number of time reductions is determined based only on the type of jackpot, it is not possible to make the presentation after the end of the special gaming state common when the V winning is successful and when the V winning is failed. As the effect data used after the end of the special gaming state based on the probable bonus, it is necessary to prepare effect data used when the V winning is successful and effect data used when the V winning is failed. Storage capacity may be required. Specifically, for example, when the specification table shown in FIG. 143 is changed so that the number of time reductions after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot is 100 times regardless of whether the V winning is successful or not, “ST30” + “short time 70” occurs when the winning is successful, and “short time 100” occurs when the V winning is unsuccessful. Therefore, as the effect data used after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation big hit The effect data for “ST30” and the effect data for “short time 70”, which are the effect data used when the V winning is successful, and the effect for “time saving 100”, which is the effect data used when the V winning is unsuccessful. It is necessary to prepare data. That is, in this case, “ST30” effect data, “short time 70” effect data, and “short time 100” effect data are prepared as effect data used after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot. It is necessary to keep it.

  In addition, the production data for “time reduction 100”, which is the production data used when the V prize is unsuccessful, can be substituted with, for example, production data for “time reduction 70” and production data for “time reduction 30”. In this case, the production data for “short time 70” in the production data used when the V winning is successful, and the production data for “short time 70” in the production data used when the V winning is unsuccessful. Although it can be shared, it is necessary to prepare separately the production data for “short time 30” among the production data used when the V prize is unsuccessful. That is, in this case, “ST30” effect data, “short time 70” effect data, and “short time 30” effect data are prepared as effect data used after the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot. It is necessary to keep it.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the V prize is successful is added to the condition for determining the number of time reductions. When the V prize is successful, not only “ST” but also “time saving” is generated, and when the V prize is successful. By making the “time saving” number of times the same as the “time saving” number of times when the V winning is unsuccessful, it is avoided that a large amount of storage capacity is required. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, only the effect data for “ST30” and the effect data for “short time 70” are prepared as the effect data used after the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot. Good.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment provides a special game value to a player when the result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a gaming state, a normally variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win and an open state in which a game ball can win, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot win in a special gaming state And a special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) having a specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) into which the game ball can flow, Probability control means (game control device 100) for setting a probability state where a result occurs to one of a normal probability state (low probability state) and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and a special variable prize Win the device A determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into a specific area, and after the end of the special game state, until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed, the normal variation winning device 37 is more than the normal state. Electric support control means (game control device 100) capable of generating an electric support state (short-time state) in which a game ball is easy to win. If the determination means does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special game state to the normal probability state, and the determination means determines that the game ball is If it is determined that it has flowed into the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to a high probability state, and the electric support control means is configured to perform the predetermined number of times (time reduction number) based on the determination result by the determination means. ) Can be determined.

  Therefore, when it is not determined by the determination means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when V winning is unsuccessful), or when the determination means determines that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (successful V winning) ), The game performance can be diversified and the fun of the game can be improved.

In addition, it is also possible to combine this embodiment and the modification 6-1 of 1st Embodiment.
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has an off state in which a game ball cannot flow into a specific area (probability change operation area 38h) in a specific round among a plurality of rounds in a special game state, and a game in the specific area. A movable member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into an ON state into which a ball can flow is provided. Special results include a first big hit (for example, a normal big hit) and a second big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit ( For example, the conversion mode of the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) in a specific round is the case where the result of the variable display game (special variable display game) is the first big win. It is the same as in the case of two big hits, and the conversion mode of the movable member is different between the case where the result of the variable display game is the first big hit and the case where the result is the second big hit. When the result of the game is the first big hit, the game is turned on until the first specific time (for example, 64 ms) elapses after the special variation winning device is opened, and the result of the variation display game is the second. In the case of a big hit, the on-state is turned on until the first specific time elapses after the special variable winning device is opened, and the second specific time (specified time; for example, after the on-state is finished). It may be turned on again after 10000 ms).

Moreover, it is also possible to combine this embodiment and the modification 6-2 of 1st Embodiment.
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has an off state in which a game ball cannot flow into a specific area (probability change operation area 38h) in a specific round among a plurality of rounds in a special game state, and a game in the specific area. A movable member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into an ON state into which a ball can flow is provided. Special results include a first big hit (for example, a normal big hit) and a second big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the first big hit ( For example, the conversion mode of the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) in a specific round is the case where the result of the variable display game (special variable display game) is the first big win. When the result of the variable display game is the first big hit, the movable member is turned on for a specific time (for example, 64 ms), and the variable display game is the same as in the case of the big hit. When the result is the second big hit, the game is turned on for a specific time, and again when the number of game balls won in the special variable winning device in a specific round reaches a specified number (a specified number, for example, 3). It may be turned on.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric support control means (game control apparatus 100) does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h) by the determination means (game control apparatus 100). In this case, after the special game state is ended, the electric support state (short-time state) can be generated until the N times (70 times in the case of the present embodiment) of the variable display game is executed. When it is determined that the ball has flowed into the specific area, the electric support state is generated until the variable display game is executed (M + N) times (in this embodiment, 100 times) after the special game state ends. The probability control means (game control device 100) is capable of M times (in the case of the present embodiment) after the special game state is ended, when the determination means determines that the game ball has flowed into the specific area. 30) Until you run the display game can be configured to set the probability state to the high probability state (probability variation state).

  With this configuration, when it is determined by the determination means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is successful), the M variation display game is executed after the special game state ends. Until then, it becomes “high probability & short time”, and after that, it becomes “low probability & short time” until the remaining N variation display games are executed. On the other hand, if it is not determined by the determining means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is unsuccessful), the “low probability” is displayed until the N-variable display game is executed after the special gaming state is completed. & There is a short time. " That is, when it is determined by the determining means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is successful), or when it is not determined by the determining means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (the V winning is unsuccessful) And “N times of“ low probability & short time ”” are common, and when it is determined by the determining means that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is successful) Since “N times“ low probability & short time ”” is added to “M times“ high probability & short time ””, the gameplay can be diversified with a simple structure. it can.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has an effect mode setting means (game control apparatus 100) that sets an effect mode of an effect performed over a plurality of variable display games from a plurality of effect modes having different effect modes. And the effect mode setting means is executed after the special game state ends when it is not determined by the determination means (game control device 100) that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h). When the game mode is determined to have flowed into the specific region by the effect mode of the effect performed over the variable display game of the number of times (70 times in the case of the present embodiment), and executed after the special game state ends. The production mode of the effect performed over N variation display games of the (M + N) times (in the case of this embodiment, 100 variation display games) to be performed is the same. It can be configured to a constant.

  With this configuration, when the determination means determines that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (when the V winning is successful), the determination means has not determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area. In the case (when the V prize is unsuccessful), it is possible to make the production mode in the same “N times with“ low probability and short time ””, so the storage capacity required for storing production data is reduced. However, game play can be diversified.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 151.
Note that the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration. The description will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly described.
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a limiter function that limits the number of times that a high probability state is continuously generated (hereinafter referred to as “the probability variation continuation number”).

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), when the winning number is won in the state where the probability variation continuation number does not reach the limit number (upper limit number) and the V winning is successful (after the special game state is finished) If the probability state at is determined to be a high probability state), the probability variation continuation count is updated. Regardless of the type of jackpot, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot is set to “high probability & short time”.

  In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number and the V winning is failed (the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is a low probability state) When it is determined that the probability variation continuation count is reset. When the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (a jackpot with a jackpot symbol which is an easy V symbol), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot is set to “low probability & short time”. When the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (a jackpot with a jackpot symbol that is not an easy V symbol), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot is set to “low probability & no time saving”.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), when the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count (in this embodiment, three times), the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is successful. The number of continuations is updated (in this embodiment, +1 is updated), and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “high probability & short time”. Then, as shown with polka dot hatching in FIG. 145 (a), if the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, the probability variation big win is won, and if the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability variation continuation number is reset. (In the case of this embodiment, 0 is cleared) and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), when the number of probability variation continuations has not reached the limit number, when a normal big win is won and the V winning is successful, the probability variation continuation number is updated and the special game The probability state after the end of the state is set to “high probability & short time”. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (b) with polka dot hatching, when the number of probability variation continuations has not reached the limit number, the normal big hit is won and the probability variation continuation number is reset if the V prize is unsuccessful. In addition, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & no time saving”.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit count, the probability variation continuation count regardless of whether the V winning is successful or the type of the jackpot. Is reset, and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot is set to “low probability & no time saving”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 146 with polka dot hatching, if the probability variation big hit (which may be a normal big hit) is won in the state where the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number, the V winning is successful. However, the probability variation continuation count is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & no time saving”.

  In addition, in the state where the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number, if a big hit is won and the V winning is successful, a presentation privilege or the like may be given to the player. Here, the production privilege is, for example, a right to execute a predetermined production (for example, an effect that changes the mode, an effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display, and a notice effect).

In addition, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number and when the V winning is successful, when the stage bonus is given to the player, the type of stage bonus to be granted is set to the jackpot You may decide according to a kind etc.
Specifically, for example, in the state where the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit count, if the big win is won and the V prize is failed, the directing privilege is not given to the player. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the state where the number of times the probability change has reached the limit number and if the V winning is successful, the player will be given a directing benefit, and if the type of jackpot is the probability change jackpot Further, more bonuses and higher-value bonuses may be given than when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot.

In FIG. 144 (a), when a normal jackpot is won and the V winning is successful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “high probability & no time saving”.
Further, in FIG. 144 (a), when a normal jackpot is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “low probability & short time”.
In addition, when the big hit is won when the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number (in the case of FIG. 144 (b)), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” May be.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, since the V winning has failed in the state where the probability variation continuation number is 2, the probability variation continuation count is reset at the time of two times. Of course, if the V winning is unsuccessful in a state where the probability variation continuation count is 1, the probability variation continuation count is reset at one time.
Moreover, when winning a big hit, you may comprise so that the production | presentation which urges | hangs how to hit aiming at V winning success may be performed.

[Big hits end processing]
In order to realize the flow shown in FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment executes the big hit end process shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 148 instead of the big hit end process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, in the jackpot end process of this embodiment, first, a flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area (step A1001), and the current special game state has a high probability and a short time. It is determined whether or not it is based on a win (step A1002).

If the current special game state is based on a high probability & short time hit (step A1002; Y), the probability variation continuation count (specifically, the value of the probability variation continuation count area) is updated by +1. (Step A1201), it is determined whether the probability variation continuation count is less than the limit count (step A1203).
On the other hand, if the current special gaming state is not based on a hit with a high probability & a short time (step A1002; N), that is, the current special gaming state is based on a hit with a low probability & no short time. In the case of any one of low probability & short time based hits, the probability variation continuation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1202), and it is determined whether the probability variation continuation count is less than the limit count. (Step A1203).

If the probability variation continuation count is not less than the limit count (step A1203; N), that is, if the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit count, information on the start of the normal mode is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state ( Step A1210), jackpot end setting processing 3 is performed (step A1211), and the process proceeds to step A1010. As a result, if the winning count is won when the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit number, the probability variation continuation count is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & no time saving” It is set (see FIG. 144 (b)).
On the other hand, when the probability variation continuation count is less than the limit count (step A1203; Y), that is, when the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count, the probability variation set when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h. It is determined whether there is operating region passage information (step A1204).

When there is probability change operation area passing information (step A1204; Y), that is, when the V winning is successful, information on the start of the ST mode (ST mode A or B) is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. (Step A1205), the jackpot end setting process 2 shown in FIG. 64 is performed (Step A1206), and the process proceeds to Step A1010. As a result, if the winning count is won when the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count and the V winning is successful, the probability variation continuation count is updated and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is “high”. “Probability & short time” is set (see FIG. 144 (a)).
On the other hand, if there is no probability variation operating region passage information (step A1204; N), that is, if the V winning is unsuccessful, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1207).

  When the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1207; Y), information on the start of the short time mode (for example, the short time mode A) is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1208). The jackpot end setting process 1 shown is performed (step A1209), and the process proceeds to step A1010. As a result, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is “ “Low probability & short time” (see FIG. 144 (a)).

  On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A1207; N), information on the start of the normal mode is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1210), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is performed. (Step A1211), the process proceeds to Step A1010. As a result, when the probability variation continuation count does not reach the limit count and the normal big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation count is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is “ “Low probability & no short time” is set (see FIG. 144 (a)).

Since the processing after Step A1010 (Steps A1010 to A1030) is the same as the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 62, description of the processing after Step A1010 will be omitted.
According to the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 148, if the winning number is won before winning the limit change number and the V winning is failed, or the winning number is won after reaching the limit number. In such a case, when the big win is won in the normal probability state (low probability state) that rushes after the special game state based on the big hit, the control for resetting the probability variation continuation number can be executed.
It is to be noted that an effect command setting process is performed by adding information on the probability variation continuation number to the probability information command prepared in step A1015 (step A1019), and the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 together with the information. May be.

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
FIG. 149 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A1211) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start of low probability & no time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal Is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1301).

  Next, a timeless number is saved in the game state display number area (step A1302), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A1303), and the special game mode flag area is specially saved. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A1304). Thereafter, the high probability variation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1305), the time shortening variation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1306), and the big hit end setting process 3 is terminated.

[Modification of jackpot end processing]
In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 147 and FIG. 148, the probability variation continuation number is changed (updated or reset) based on the probability state before the special gaming state at the end of the special gaming state. The change timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, a jackpot end process in which FIG. 147 is replaced with FIG. 150, that is, a jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 150 and 148, can be configured to change the probability variation continuation number when the probability state is switched. Of course, even the jackpot end processing shown in FIGS. 150 and 148 can realize the flows shown in FIGS. 145 and 146.

In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 150 and FIG. 148, the process of step A1002, A1201, and A1202 is not executed, and the process of determining whether the probability variation continuation number is less than the limit number is performed (step A1203).
If the probability variation continuation count is not less than the limit count (step A1203; N), that is, if the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit count, the probability variation continuation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1223). Then, information on the start of the normal mode is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1210), the jackpot end setting process 3 is performed (step A1211), and the process proceeds to step A1010.
On the other hand, if the probability variation continuation count is less than the limit count (step A1203; Y), that is, if the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count, it is determined whether there is probability variation operation region passage information (step A1204).

When there is probability variation operating region passage information (step A1204; Y), that is, when the V winning is successful, after performing the process of updating the probability variation continuation number by one (step A1221), the effect after the end of the special gaming state ST mode start information is prepared as a mode (step A1205), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1206), and the process proceeds to step A1010.
On the other hand, if there is no probability variation operating region passage information (step A1204; N), that is, if the V winning is unsuccessful, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1207).

If the jackpot symbol is an easy V symbol (step A1207; Y), the process of clearing the probability variation continuation number area to 0 (step A1222) is performed, and then the short time mode starts as the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. Information is prepared (step A1208), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1209), and the process proceeds to step A1010.
On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol is not an easy V symbol (step A1207; N), a normal mode is started as an effect mode after the end of the special game state after performing a process of clearing the probability variation continuation number area (step A1223). Is prepared (step A1210), jackpot end setting processing 3 is performed (step A1211), and the process proceeds to step A1010.

  Here, when the probability variation continuation number is changed (updated or reset) when the probability state is switched, it is necessary to change the probability variation continuation number not only in the big hit ending process but also in the time reduction variation frequency update process, for example. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot end processing shown in FIGS. 150 and 148 is executed, the time reduction variation frequency update processing shown in FIG. 151 is executed instead of the time reduction variation frequency update processing shown in FIG. To do. That is, the probability variation continuation count is reset when the high probability variation count becomes “0” and the high probability state is switched to the low probability state.

Specifically, in the time shortening variation number update process shown in FIG. 151, when the high probability variation number becomes “0” (step A754; Y), that is, the high probability state ends in this special map variation display game. If so, in addition to the processing in steps A755 and A756, processing for clearing the probability variation continuation count area to 0 (step A766) is performed. As a result, the probability variation continuation count can be reset when the high probability variation count becomes “0” and the high probability state is switched to the low probability state.
Note that, in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when “high probability & short time” is set, the high probability state and the short time state have the same number of special drawings. Since the game is ended by executing the variable display game, the high probability state and the short-time state are ended simultaneously.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment provides a special game value to the player when the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a gaming state, in a special gaming state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and a specific area in which the game ball can flow in (probable change operation) A special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) having a region 38h), a probability state in which a special result occurs, a normal probability state (low probability state), and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. , A probability control means (game control device 100) to be set to any one of the above, a determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not a game ball won in the special variation winning device has flowed into the specific area, and a high probability state Succession of And the number (probability variation successive number) counting (updated) counting means (game controller 100), and a. Then, if it is not determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special game state to the normal probability state, and the game ball has flowed into the specific area. If it is determined that the number of continuations has not reached the predetermined upper limit (limit number), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to a high probability state, and the game ball is placed in a specific area. If it is determined that it has flowed and the number of continuations has reached a predetermined upper limit, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and the counting means is a probability control means The number of continuations is reset based on the setting of the normal probability state.

Therefore, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state (or when it is set to the normal probability state), the probability variation continuation count is reset, so the number of occurrences of the high probability state is limited. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from becoming too high.
In the present embodiment, the probability variation continuation count is updated by +1 (counting up), but the probability variation continuation count may be updated by -1 (counting down).
In addition, since the present embodiment is configured to count up the probability variation continuation count, the probability variation continuation count is reset by clearing the probability variation continuation count to zero. On the other hand, in the case of a configuration that counts down the probability variation continuation count, for example, the probability variation continuation count is reset by setting an upper limit count (limit count) as the probability variation continuation count.

In the jackpot end processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 and the jackpot end processing shown in FIGS. 150 and 148, when the probability variation continuation count is not less than the limit count (step A1203; N), that is, the probability variation continuation count is set to the limit count. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the processing of steps A1210 and A1211 (processing to enter a low probability state) is executed.
For example, when the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count, it is possible to configure the probability variation operation region switch 38d to be invalid and not to execute the process of step A1203. In such a configuration, when the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit number, even if the V winning is successful, it is determined in step A1204 that there is no probability variation operation region passing information, and the low probability state is entered. Processing (steps A1208 and A1209 and steps A1210 and A1211) to be performed is executed. That is, a method for performing control so that the game ball does not enter the high probability state (probability variation state) despite the fact that the game ball has passed the probability variation operation region 38h (successful V winning) is a V detection sensor (probability variation operation region switch). 38d) may be a detection invalid state. Thereby, when the V winning prize is successful when the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count, the success is invalidated, and the high probability state can be prevented from entering.

<Modification 1 of 4th Embodiment>
Next, Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 157.
For example, as shown in FIG. 152, if the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count and the V winning is failed, whether or not the probability variation continuation count is reset according to the type of the jackpot You may decide.

As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the state where the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the special gaming state is ended. If the probability state is set to “low probability & short time”, there is a possibility that a player who makes a correct hit will be disadvantaged.
For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), in the state where the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number, if the probability variation big win is won and the V winning is successful, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the special gaming state Since the probability state after the end is set to “low probability & no time saving”, an advantageous period (a period in which a high probability state can be generated. To the time until the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count), the process ends upon expiration. And after the end of the special game state, it enters a low probability state and a state that is not a short time state (a state where game balls are likely to decrease). Here, when the probability variation continuation count is reset, a new advantageous period starts by winning the big win and succeeding in the V prize.
Therefore, when the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number, if the player wins the probability variation big win and succeeds in the V prize, the player waits for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls tends to decrease. .

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the special game state is reset. If the probability state after the end is set to “low probability & short time”, the advantageous period ends before the expiration. Then, after the special game state ends, the vehicle enters a low-probability state and a short-time state (a state where game balls are hard to decrease).
Therefore, when the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability variation continuation count is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” When “Yes” is set, the player can wait for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls is difficult to decrease.

In this way, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability”. When “& short time” is set, the player who always hits the V winning success (for example, as shown in FIG. 153 (a)), the player can start a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls tends to decrease. On the other hand, a player who is striking the timing and deliberately aiming for a V-winning failure (for example, as shown in FIG. 153 (b)), has a new advantage period in a state where the number of game balls is difficult to decrease. You can wait for the start.
Therefore, the way to always aim for the V winning success (when the advantageous period ends when the advantageous period expires) is more than the case where the intention to aim for the V prize failure (when the advantageous period ends before the expiration). There is a possibility that the probability of entering a high probability state will be low.
Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who always aims to succeed in winning the V prize is more disadvantageous than a player who dares to aim for V winning failure.

Therefore, in this modified example, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, the probability variation big hit is won, and when the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is updated.
Specifically, in the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the number of continuations of probability variation has not reached the limit number, the big win is won and the V winning is unsuccessful. If the type of is a probable big hit, the probability change continuation count is updated, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the probable big hit is set to “low probability & short time”, and the type of the big hit is In the case of a normal big hit, the probability variation continuation count is reset, and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the normal big hit is set to “low probability & no short time”.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 154, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability variation continuation number is updated and the special gaming state is ended. The later probability state is set to “low probability & short time”.
As a result, if you win the odds and win the V prize, you will enter the low probability state, but if you win the odds and win the V prize (if you enter the high probability state), Since the probability variation continuation count is updated (the advantageous period does not end), the probability of entering the high-probability state is not advantageous even if the V prize is failed.
In addition, if the V-winning is successful, the player cannot enter the high-probability state because the V-winning has failed even though the V-winning has been successful. The probability state of the special figure variation display game in is not advantageous. Therefore, in this modification, it is not advantageous to fail the V prize before the expiration of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is not valid (how to dare to aim for the V prize failure despite winning the promising big hit). It is possible to prevent such a disadvantage that a player who makes a correct hit becomes disadvantageous.

Here, if the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count, if the probability variation jackpot is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” After that, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0”, the probability state is switched from “low probability & short time” to “low probability & short time”. After the probability state switches to “low probability & no time saving”, the player will wait for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls is likely to decrease. The player who hits it will not be disadvantaged.
Therefore, in this modification, when the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count, if the probability variation big win is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the “low probability & short duration” that occurs after “low probability & short time” occurs. Based on “no time saving”, the probability variation continuation count is reset. In addition, when the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count, if you win the probability variation jackpot and fail the V prize, it will be based on the “low probability & no time saving” that follows the “low probability & time saving” In addition, it is possible to configure so that the number of times of probability variation is not changed (updated or reset).

In FIG. 152 (a), if the player wins a normal jackpot and succeeds in the V prize, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “high probability & no time saving”.
In FIG. 152 (a), when a normal big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “low probability & short time”.
In addition, when the jackpot is won when the probability variation continuation number reaches the limit number (in the case of FIG. 152 (b)), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” May be.

[Big hits end processing]
In order to realize the flow shown in FIG. 154, the game control apparatus 100 according to the present modification executes the jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 155 and 148 instead of the jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 147 and 148.
As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 148, in the big hit ending process of this modification, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1001), and the current special game state has a low probability and no short time. It is determined whether or not it is based on a win (step A1231).

If the current special gaming state is not based on a hit with low probability & no short time (step A1231; N), that is, this special gaming state is based on a hit with low probability & short time, high If it is one based on the probability & short time, the probability variation continuation count is updated by +1 (step A1201), and the process proceeds to step A1203.
On the other hand, if the current special gaming state is based on a low probability & no win, the probability variation continuation count area is cleared to 0 (step A1202) and the process proceeds to step A1203. To do.
Since the processing after Step A1203 is the same as the jackpot end processing shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the description of the processing after Step A1203 is omitted.

For example, according to the jackpot ending process shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, if the V winning is failed even though the probability variation big win is won before the probability variation continuation number reaches the limit number, the special game based on the probability variation big hit If the big win is won in the normal probability state (low probability state) that rushes after the state ends, the probability variation continuation count is reset. However, if you reset the number of continuations of probability change in such a case, the probability of entering a high probability state will increase, so if you win the probability variation big win and fail the V winning, you will pull back the big hit again May be disadvantageous, and a player who makes a correct hit may be disadvantaged.
On the other hand, according to the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 148, if the V winning is failed even though the probability variation big win is won before the probability variation continuation number reaches the limit number, If the big hit is won again in the normal probability state (low probability state) that enters after the end of the special gaming state based on the above, the probability variation continuation count can be updated (converted from the previous count). As a result, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that a player who makes a correct hit becomes disadvantageous.

[Modification of jackpot end processing]
In the jackpot ending process shown in FIGS. 155 and 148, the probability variation continuation number is changed (updated or reset) based on the probability state before the special gaming state at the end of the special gaming state. The change timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, a jackpot end process in which FIG. 155 is replaced with FIG. 156, that is, a jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 156 and 148, can be configured to change the probability variation continuation number when the probability state is switched. Of course, even the jackpot end process shown in FIGS. 156 and 148 can realize the flow shown in FIG.

In the jackpot ending process shown in FIGS. 156 and 148, the process (step A1203) for determining whether the probability variation continuation number is less than the limit number is performed without executing the processes of steps A1231, A1201, and A1202.
Further, when there is no probability variation operating region passage information (step A1204; N) and the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1207; Y), a process of updating the probability variation continuation number by one (step A1236). After that, information on the start of the short time mode is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special gaming state (step A1208), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A1209), and the process proceeds to step A1010.

  Here, when the probability variation continuation number is changed (updated or reset) when the probability state is switched, it is necessary to change the probability variation continuation number not only in the big hit ending process but also in the time reduction variation frequency update process, for example. Therefore, in the present modification, when the big hit end process shown in FIGS. 156 and 148 is executed, the time reduction fluctuation number update process shown in FIG. 157 is executed instead of the time reduction fluctuation number update process shown in FIG. To do. That is, when the high probability variation number becomes “0” and the high probability state is switched to the low probability state, the probability variation continuation number is reset, and the time shortening variation number becomes “0” and the time reduction state is not the time reduction state. Resets the number of times of continuity change when switching to the state. In this modification, the probability variation continuation count is updated based on “high probability & time saving” and also updated based on “low probability & time saving”, so the probability variation continues when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition to resetting the number of times, the probability variation continuation number is also reset when switching from the short-time state to the non-short-time state.

Specifically, in the time shortening variation number update process shown in FIG. 157, when the high probability variation number becomes “0” (step A754; Y), that is, the high probability state ends in this special map variation display game. If so, in addition to the processing in steps A755 and A756, processing for clearing the probability variation continuation count area to 0 (step A766) is performed. As a result, the probability variation continuation count can be reset when the high probability variation count becomes “0” and the high probability state is switched to the low probability state.
Further, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time saving state ends in the current special figure fluctuation display game, in addition to the processing of steps A759 to A765, the probability variation Processing for clearing the continuation count area to 0 (step A767) is performed. As a result, the probability variation continuation count can be reset when the time shortening variation count becomes “0” and the state is switched from the short-time state to the non-short-time state.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the special game state includes the first special game state (a special game state based on a normal jackpot) and a specific region ( There is a second special game state (special game state based on the probability variable big hit) in which the game ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation region 38h), and the counting means (game control device 100) specifies the game ball in the second special game state. Based on the setting of the normal probability state (low probability state) by the probability control means (game control device 100) due to the fact that it has not been determined that it has flowed into the area, the number of continuations (probability variation continuation number) is not reset Has been.

Therefore, in the case where the V winning is unsuccessful in spite of winning the probability variation big hit, since the probability variation continuation count is not reset, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the player who makes a correct hit becomes disadvantageous.
In the present modification, the configuration is such that the probability variation continuation number is updated when the V winning is unsuccessful despite winning the probability variation big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the V winning is unsuccessful despite winning the probability variation big hit, the probability variation continuation number may not be changed (updated or reset), that is, the probability variation continuation number may be maintained.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment includes a normal variation winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot be won and an open state in which game balls can be won, and the end of the special gaming state. Thereafter, until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games (special figure fluctuation display game) are executed, the electric support state (short time state) in which the game ball is more likely to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the normal state (state not in the short time state). Electric support control means (game control device 100) that can be generated, and the counting means (game control device 100) is configured to reset the number of continuations (probability change continuation number) based on the end of the electric support state. It is possible.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment not only resets the probability variation continuation number when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state, but also changes from the short-time state to the non-short-time state. It is possible to configure so as to reset the probability variation continuation number even when switching.
By configuring in this way, the probability variation continuation count is reset when the time-short state ends (or when the time-short state ends), so the number of occurrences of the high-probability state can be limited and the euphoria becomes too high. This can be prevented.

<Modification 2 of 4th Embodiment>
Next, Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 159.
For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in the first modification of the fourth embodiment, when “high probability & short time” is set, the special figure variation display game is executed with a different number of times between the high probability state and the short time state. In other words, the high-probability state and the short-time state may end at different timings.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count and the V winning is successful, regardless of the type of the jackpot, After the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot, a gaming state in which “high probability & short time” continues for a predetermined first number of times (for example, 30 times) of the special figure display game occurs, “There is a short time” may be configured such that a gaming state that continues for a predetermined second number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game is generated.

With this configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the probability variation big hit (which may be a normal big win) is won and the V winning is successful in a state where the number of times of the probability variation has not reached the limit number. In addition, the probability variation continuation number is updated and “high probability & short time” occurs. And when “High probability & short time” for the first number of times ends, “Low probability & short time” occurs, and then when “Low probability & short time” for the second number of times ends. Causes “low probability & no time saving”.
On the other hand, as shown in, for example, FIG. 159, when the probability variation continuation number is not reached the limit number and the probability variation big win is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is updated and “low probability & short time” Yes "occurs. Then, when the “low probability & short time” for the second number of times is completed, “low probability & short time” occurs.

Here, in this modified example, as in the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count in order to avoid the disadvantage that a player who makes a correct hit becomes disadvantageous. If the V winning is unsuccessful even though the probability variation is won in the absence, the probability variation continuation count is updated. That is, the probability variation continuation count is updated based on the “low probability & short time” that occurs when the V winning is unsuccessful.
On the other hand, it is not necessary to avoid the advantage of a player who makes a proper hit. Therefore, in this modified example, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, the probability variation big hit is won, and when the V winning is successful, the probability variation continuation number is reset. That is, the probability variation continuation count is reset based on the “low probability & short time” that occurs following the “high probability & short time” when the V prize is successful. Thereby, the player can wait for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls is difficult to decrease.
Also, in the present modification, as in Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, the probability variation big win is won and the V prize is failed. Is reset based on the “low probability & no time saving” that occurs following the “low probability & time saving”.

Note that in FIG. 158 (a), when a normal jackpot is won and the V winning is successful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “high probability & no time saving”.
Further, in FIG. 158 (a), when a normal jackpot is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “low probability & short time”.
In addition, when the big win is won when the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number (in the case of FIG. 158 (b)), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” May be.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the electric support control means (game control device 100) does not determine that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h). After the end of the special game state, the electronic support state (short-time state) can be generated until N times (for example, 100 times) of the change display game (special view change display game) is executed. If it is determined that it has flowed into the game, the electric support state can be generated until the (M + N) times (for example, 130 times) of the variable display game is executed after the special game state ends, and the probability control means (game When it is determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the control device 100) has a high probability of the probability state until the variable display game is executed M times (for example, 30 times) after the special game state ends. Set to state and count When it is determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the stage (the game control device 100) changes from the high probability state to the normal probability state (low probability state) associated with the end of the M number of variable display games. It is possible to configure so as to reset the number of continuations (number of times of continuity of probability change) based on switching to.

Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when the V prize is successful, “ST (high probability & short time)” is followed by “ST (low probability & short time)”. Will occur. Then, it is possible to configure so that the probability variation continuation count is reset when switching from “ST” to “short time” (or when switching).
By configuring in this way, when the V winning is successful, the probability variation continuation count is reset based on the end of the high probability state before the probability variation continuation count is reset based on the end of the short-time state. The hitting method that always aims at V winning success is more advantageous than the hitting method that dares to fail V winning, and can prevent the hitting method that dares to fail V winning.

<Modification 3 of 4th Embodiment>
Next, Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation continuation count has not reached the limit count and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation count is reset and special regardless of the type of the jackpot. The probability state after the end of the gaming state may be set to “low probability & no time saving”.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the case where the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the special game If the probability state after the end of the state is set to “low probability & short time”, there is a possibility that a player who makes a correct way will be disadvantaged.
For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), in the state where the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number, if the probability variation big win is won and the V winning is successful, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the special gaming state Since the probability state after the end is set to “low probability & no time saving”, the advantageous period ends when the special gaming state ends, and after the special gaming state ends, the state enters the low probability state and the state that is not the time saving state. Therefore, the player waits for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls tends to decrease.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the special game state is reset. When the probability state after the end is set to “low probability & short time”, the advantageous period ends before the expiration, and after the special gaming state ends, the low probability state and the short time state enter. Therefore, the player can wait for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls is difficult to decrease.
Therefore, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is failed, the probability variation continuation number is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” When “Yes” is set, when you always aim for V winning success (when the advantageous period ends with expiration), when you dare to aim for V winning failure (when the advantageous period ends before expiration) May be more disadvantageous than

Therefore, in this modified example, when the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, if the probability variation big hit is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & no time reduction”. To "".
Specifically, in the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 160 (a), if the number of continuations of probability variation has not reached the limit number, a big win is won and if the V winning is unsuccessful, Regardless of the type, the probability variation continuation count is reset and the probability state after the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot is set to “low probability & no time saving”.

As a result, when the player is daring to aim for a V-winning failure (when the advantageous period ends before the expiration), the player is always aiming for a successful V-winning (when the advantageous period ends with the expiration). Similarly, since the player waits for the start of a new advantageous period in a state where the number of game balls is likely to decrease, the probability of entering the high probability state does not become advantageous even if the V winning is failed.
In addition, if the V-winning is successful, the player cannot enter the high-probability state because the V-winning has failed even though the V-winning has been successful. The probability state of the special figure variation display game in is not advantageous. Therefore, in this modification, it is not advantageous to fail the V prize before the expiration of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is not valid (how to dare to aim for the V prize failure despite winning the promising big hit). It is possible to prevent such a disadvantage that a player who makes a correct hit becomes disadvantageous.

Note that in FIG. 160 (a), when a normal jackpot is won and the V winning is successful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state may be set to “high probability & no time saving”.
Further, in FIG. 160 (a), when a normal jackpot is won and the V winning is unsuccessful, the probability state after the end of the special game state may be set to “low probability & short time”.
Further, in FIG. 160 (a), when the big win is won and the V winning is successful, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is “ST (high probability & short time) → low probability & short time”. May be set. In other words, when “high probability & short time” is set, the special probability variation display game may be executed a different number of times between the high probability state and the short time state.
In addition, when the big win is won when the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number (in the case of FIG. 160 (b)), the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to “low probability & short time” May be.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification of the fourth embodiment includes the normal variation winning device 37 that can convert the game ball into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and the special game state. After completion, until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games (special figure fluctuation display game) are executed, the electric support state (short time state) in which the game ball is more likely to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the normal state (non-short time state). Electric support control means (game control device 100) capable of generating the power, and the electric support control means is a case where the number of continuations (the number of times of probability variation continuation) has not reached a predetermined upper limit number (the number of limits), When it is determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (probability changing operation area 38h), the electric support state is generated after the special game state is ended.
Accordingly, when the V winning is unsuccessful despite winning the probable big hit, the short-time state does not occur, so that it is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the player who makes the right game becomes disadvantageous.

<Modification 4 of 4th Embodiment>
Next, Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 162.
For example, as shown in FIG. 161, in the fourth embodiment and the first to third modifications of the fourth embodiment, when the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count, only the normal big hit may be won. .

If the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit number and you win the probability variation jackpot (variation stop with V easy symbol), regardless of whether the V winning is successful or not, it will be in a low probability state after the end of the special game state storm in. On the other hand, if a player wins a promising big hit and succeeds in a V prize, the player may always expect to enter a high probability state, and if such a false expectation is given to the player. There is a risk that the interest of the player will be reduced.
Therefore, in this modification, when the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count, only the normal jackpot is won and the probability variation jackpot is not won. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an erroneous sense of expectation.

  First, in the present modification, for example, the latest probability variation continuation count is acquired before execution of step A153 of the special figure hold information determination process (see FIG. 33). Specifically, for example, the probability variation continuation number is changed when the probability state is switched, such as the big hit end process shown in FIGS. 150 and 148 and the time reduction variation number update process shown in FIG. 151.

Then, in step A154 or step A163 of the special figure hold information determination process (see FIG. 33), it is determined whether or not the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number. A jackpot symbol random number check table (see FIG. 162 (a)) capable of selecting both symbols (V easy symbols) is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has reached, a big hit symbol random number check table (see FIG. 162 (b)) capable of selecting only normal symbols is set.
Further, in step A403 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 45) and in step A433 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not the probability variation continuation number has reached the limit number. If it is determined that it has not been reached, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table and a special figure 2 big hit symbol table (see FIG. 162 (a)) that can select both a normal symbol and a probable variation symbol (V easy symbol) are set. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has reached, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table and a special figure 2 big hit symbol table (see FIG. 162 (b)) that can select only normal symbols are set.

In FIG. 162 (a), if the jackpot symbol random number is any of “0” to “63”, stop symbol information and stop symbol number corresponding to the normal symbol are acquired, and the jackpot symbol random number is “64”. ”To“ 99 ”, a table in which stop symbol information and stop symbol numbers corresponding to probability variation symbols are obtained is illustrated, but stop symbol information and stop symbol numbers corresponding to normal symbols are acquired. The range of the jackpot symbol random number for this is not limited to “0” to “63”, but can be changed as appropriate. Similarly, the range of the jackpot symbol random number for acquiring the stop symbol information and the stop symbol number corresponding to the probability variation symbol is not limited to “64” to “99”, and can be changed as appropriate.
In the example shown in FIG. 162, the range of the jackpot symbol random number is “0” to “99”, but the range of the jackpot symbol random number is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate.

Here, in this modified example, when the big win is won in a state where the probability variation continuation number has not reached the limit number, an effect that prompts the player to hit the V winning success is executed, and the probability variation continuation number is the limit number. It is possible to configure so that the effect is not executed when a big hit is won in a state where the value has been reached. The fourth embodiment and the first to third modifications of the fourth embodiment can be configured in this way.
Further, in this modified example, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation continuation count has reached the limit number, the lever member 38i for changing the probability of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operation region 38h does not operate (that is, The lever member 38i protrudes forward and closes without being converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot flow into the probability variation operating region 38h, and is retracted rearward and converted into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. It can also be configured to maintain the state). The fourth embodiment and the first to third modifications of the fourth embodiment can be configured in this way.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment includes selection means (game control device 100) that selects one special result from a plurality of types of special results as the special result. There is a first big hit (normal big hit) and a second big hit (probable big hit) in which a game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability changing operation area 38h) in a special gaming state than the first big hit, and the selection means continues When the number of times (probability variation number of times) has reached a predetermined upper limit number (limit number of times), the second big hit is not selected as a special result.

Therefore, when the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count, the probability variation big hit is not won, so that it is possible to prevent the player from giving false expectation.
That is, after the probability variation continuation count reaches the limit count, the player can recognize that the transition to the high probability state (probability variation state) is not made because the variation stops with the normal symbol.
In addition, after reaching the limit number of times the probability variation continues, if you win the normal jackpot and succeed in the V prize, the success will be invalidated and will shift to a low probability state, so the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot It is possible to avoid the occurrence of irregularities such as transition to a high probability state after the completion of, and to ensure consistency between the stop symbol and the probability state.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. The configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 37 normal variable winning device 38 first special variable winning device (special variable winning device)
38h Probability change operation area (specific area)
100 Game control device (probability control means, determination means, counting means, electric support control means, selection means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a result of a variation display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information results in a special result,
A normally variable winning device that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot win and an open state in which a game ball can win,
A special variable winning device having a specific area into which a game ball can flow, and which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win.
Probability control means for setting the probability state in which the special result occurs to either a normal probability state or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state;
Determining means for determining whether or not a game ball won in the special variation winning device flows into the specific area;
An electric support control means capable of generating an electric support state in which a game ball is more likely to win the normal variation winning device than the normal state until the predetermined number of times of the variable display game is executed after the special game state ends;
Counting means for counting the number of continuations of the high probability state,
The probability control means includes
If it is not determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the normal probability state,
When it is determined that a game ball has flowed into the specific area, and the number of continuations has not reached a predetermined upper limit number, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set as the high probability state. Set to
When it is determined that a game ball has flowed into the specific area and the number of continuations has reached the predetermined upper limit number, the probability state after the end of the special game state is determined as the normal probability. Set to the state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the counting means resets the number of continuations based on completion of the power support state. The electric support control means includes:
If it is not determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the electric support state can be generated until the variable display game is executed N times after the special game state ends.
When it is determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the electric support state can be generated until the (M + N) times of the variable display game is executed after the special game state ends.
When it is determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the probability control means determines the probability state to be the high probability until the variable display game is executed M times after the special game state is finished. Set to the state,
When it is determined that the game ball has flowed into the specific area, the counting means switches the probability state from the high probability state to the normal probability state upon completion of the M number of variable display games. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the number of continuations is reset based on the game machine.

Images